0% found this document useful (0 votes)

12 views535 pages

C150EF Equipment Installation Guide

Q: What procedure should be followed when abnormal noise is detected during jacking operations?

When abnormal noise is detected during jacking operations, it's important to immediately report the problem, including the location and description of the noise (e.g., frequency and level) for further analysis and records .

Q: How should the integrity of climbing pinions be verified?

The integrity of climbing pinions should be verified through mechanical inspection by the manufacturer's service engineer. Inspect all periodical inspection points, random gearboxes, and specifically all climbing pinions, culminating in a final inspection report .

Q: What maintenance schedule is recommended for ensuring the long-term functionality of a jacking unit?

For long-term functionality of a jacking unit, periodic inspections by rig staff (mechanical/electrical) and a comprehensive inspection every five years by a manufacturer's service engineer are recommended. Follow a detailed maintenance schedule to preserve equipment longevity .

Q: How can the torque-holding ability of a brake be confirmed and adjusted if necessary?

To confirm and adjust the torque-holding ability of a brake, first test the brake with a torque wrench and socket to ensure the torque is above the minimum required. It's common for new brakes not to hold initially, necessitating repeated torquing and releasing until the brake maintains the required torque. Replace seals on the brake carcase and cover as part of maintenance .

Q: What actions should be taken when a circuit breaker associated with a motor trips during operation?

When a circuit breaker associated with a motor trips, check the circuit breaker position to identify the short circuit, verify auxiliary contact circuit, and inspect I/O moduli for connection integrity. Replace any tripped fuses and ensure connections are secure .

Q: What critical steps need to be verified before proceeding with pre-commissioning of control electrical systems?

Before proceeding with pre-commissioning, it is crucial to ensure that the brake supply circuit breaker is off, CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker is off, RM relay coil is disconnected, and supply plugs on the two Ethernet I/O modules are unplugged. Additionally, switch off the CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker, connect the RM relay coil, and then switch on the CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker. Check the RM relay to ensure it is on when all emergency stops are released and off when an emergency stop is pushed. Do not continue if these points are incorrect .

Q: What maintenance actions are required if corrosion is observed during equipment inspection?

If corrosion is observed during equipment inspection, report any issue, note locations requiring paint application, and identify any rusty parts needing replacement to prevent further degradation .

Q: What are the troubleshooting steps when an MCC indicates an insulation fault?

To troubleshoot an insulation fault indicated by an MCC, switch off the MCC and check the insulation. Diagnose for control relay failure by checking the relay and its connections, and verify if the insulation controller LED is functioning properly .

Q: How is emergency stop functionality verified in MCC pre-commissioning?

During MCC pre-commissioning, verify emergency stop functionality by ensuring the RM relay is on when emergency stops are released and off when any one is activated. Do not proceed if the RM relay does not behave as expected, as this impacts safety compliance .

Q: What procedures are used to address a network fault in the redundancy network of a jacking system?

To address a network fault in the redundancy network, verify that all jacking equipment is supplied and inspect the network page display for connected equipment. Check the Ethernet switch and optic fiber status, ensuring proper supply and connection .

Uploaded by

J R

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

12 views535 pages

C150EF Equipment Installation Guide

Uploaded by

J R

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

NOV - BLM

SUMMARY

WARNING

A/ SAFETIES

B/ GENERAL AND DESCRIPTION

C/ INSTALLATION

D/ ADVISE FOR USE

E/ MAINTENANCE, REPAIR

F/ PARTS LIST

G/ MECHANICAL PARTS

I/ CONTROL GEAR

J/ ELECTRICAL MOTORS

ABR – 14/10/13 – Rev. 01 SOMMAIRE

22/03/06
AVERTISSEMENT NLE
Ind.
WARNING Fol 1/1

La totalité des composants de ce matériel a été sélectionnée, adaptée et contrôlée par

les bureaux d’études et laboratoires de NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO.

L’usage ou l’adaptation de toute pièce de rechange qui n’aurait pas été livrée et certi-
fiée conforme par NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO mettrait un terme à la garantie de
l’ensemble de ce matériel et dégagerait la responsabilité de NATIONAL OILWELL
VARCO en cas d’avarie ou d’accident.

*********

All the components of this equipment have been selected, adapted and checked by
laboratories and research department of NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO.

Use or adaptation of any spare parts which would not have been delivered and certified
by NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, would stop the guarantee of all the equipment and
would disclaim responsibility of NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO in case of damage or
accident.

G002
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724261-001 Rev.01 EQUIPEMENT PLATEFORME-JU2000E-H1285-C150EF RIG EQUIPMENT-JU2000E-H1285-C150EF

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

F01 1 RECHANGES MISE EN SERVICE 10724061-001 COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS
F02 1 RECHANGES 1 AN 10724062-001 ONE YEAR SPARE PARTS
G01 27 MECANISME ARRGT A AVEC PLMS 10724042-001 GEAR UNIT ARRGT A WITH PLMS
G02 27 MECANISME ARRGT B AVEC PLMS 10724041-001 GEAR UNIT ARRGT B WITH PLMS
G03 54 PIECES MONTAGE DANS CHASSIS C150EF 10724083-001 C150EF MOUNTING PARTS FOR JACK FRAME
G04 9 DETECTEUR DE HAUTEUR 10008074-001 HEIGHT DETECTION
G05 1 OUTILLAGE + DIVERS 10008015-001 TOOLING
I01 3 APPAREILLAGE JACKING 10724047-001 JACKING MCC
I02 1 PUPITRE CENTRAL 10724048-001 CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE
I03 1 BOITE BOUTON COMMANDE FREIN 10724049-001 BRAKE CONTROL BUTTON BOX
I04 9 COFFRET COMMANDE LOCALE + ELT 10724050-001 LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLE
I05 1 COFFRET COMMANDE AUTOMATE SECOURS 10724051-001 PLC BACKUP CONTROL CHEST
I06 3 COFFRET COMMANDE JACKING SECOURS 10724052-001 EMERGENCY JACKING CONTROL CHEST
I07 3 COFFRET COMMANDE RESISTANCE AIR 10725110-001 AIR RESISTOR CONTROL CHEST
3 RESISTANCE DE CHARGE AIR 10725229-001 CHARGING RESISTOR AIR TYPE
54 PLAQUE PRESSE ETOUPE MOTEUR 10724055-001 MOTOR CABLE GLAND PLATE
1 ETIQUETAGE ELECTRIQUE 10724064-001 ELECTRICAL LABELLING
9 TUYAU DE NIVEAU 10861705-001 LEVEL HOSE
54 PIECES DE NIVEAU 10866981-001 LEVEL PARTS

Page 1 / 1
PART A
Document
SAFETIES

• Safety cautions G005

• Handling A-C150EF

 Dimensions C150EF (C.o.G) 10724071

ABR–11/06/13 – Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-A

14/10/13
ABR
SAFETY CAUTIONS Rev. 01
Fol 1/2

WARNING:

During the installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment SAFETY comes
first. All equipment must be fitted, operated, adjusted and serviced by skilled worker,
specialised in the construction and operation of this kind of equipment. They have
also to be familiar with any potential hazards and the appropriate operating and
maintenance instructions. Personal injury or equipment damage may result of the
non-observance of this warning.

NOTE:

Accurate installation, maintenance and safety instructions must be given by the

owner to personnel directly responsible for the equipment operation. In addition, the
procedures set forth in the operating instructions must be followed carefully.

Guards, alarms, heaters and other safety devices which may be provided by
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO must be fitted by the owner.

The owner is responsible for providing and installing any guards or other safety
equipment needed to protect operating personnel as required by applicable safety
regulations promulgated by the jurisdiction in which the unit is located.

The owner has the responsibility of complying with all safety rules when installing the
equipment.

All unauthorised personnel must be required to remain at a safe distance from

spinning shafts, couplings, clutches and any other rotating or moving components.

Do not connect the prime mover to its power source until all equipment is properly
installed, lubrication added, bolts torqued and safety devices fitted and checked out
by skilled worker.

Prior to servicing or closely inspecting any machinery, should it be installed, set

ready for operation or actually put into operating mode, disconnect and lock out
prime mover power source.

Do not exceed any design limitations or make modifications to this equipment without
consulting NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO previously.

The operator must make sure that safety devices, guards, alarms, etc... are not
disconnected or out of order.

G005
14/10/13
ABR
BEFORE USING Rev. 01
Fol 2/2

Switchgear lockers must be properly closed and locked.

Opening the switchgears cabinet is reserved to authorised personnel after making
sure main power supplies, reheating power supply and auxiliary power supply are
disconnected.

Prior to opening any component equipped with electrical device such as switchgears
cabinet, motors, terminal box, junction box, etc... make sure the all equipment is
disconnected.

In case of accidental situation, should the equipment receive abnormal impacts or

should it be used the design limitation, it is strictly necessary to check carefully and
immediately all the parts likely to be damaged before going on operating.

The equipment cannot be used again without having proceeded with this checking.

In addition to normal maintenance operation described in this book it is necessary to

perform frequently visual and tightening checking of bolts. Any anomaly will be
corrected by dismantling and checking the bolt.

The equipment or parts delivered by NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO must absolutely

be fitted on.
However, the owner has to supply and maintain all complementary safety devices to
adapt the product to the environment where it will be based.

Usually, the attendance of crewmen is reserved for men trained on that kind of
equipment and consequently the owner must, in accordance with the Labour rules,
have any people likely to attend on the equipment trained on safety instructions and
on capacity limits of the machinery. NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO remains at the
disposal of his customer to make the proper training which may take place either on
site or in our factory at Carquefou.

Attention must be paid to all the indicating plates and stickers fitted on the
equipment. Do not take them off or paint them. Should this occur, the owner must
replace immediately. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure the correct readingness
of the indicating plates.

Should any abnormal noise, incorrect running or cracks be noticed during operation,
the owner must immediately warn NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO service
department in order to avoid any further troubles.

Owner is responsible for ensuring that safety devices, guards, alarms, etc... are not
removed, disconnected and/or disabled. Should the owner be brought to remove
defective parts, those must be removed by original part bought from NATIONAL
OILWELL VARCO.

G005
14/10/13
ABR
HANDLING Rev. 01
Fol 1/1

When handling equipment, care must be taken to avoid supporting or lifting in a manner
that would place excessive stress on parts which are not designed to support the unit
weight. When equipment is resting on the floor, it must be in a normal, upright position
with the weight resting on the mounting surface (see drawing: Dimensions C150EF -
10724071).

The equipment must be fitted only with the designated lifting holes or special eyebolts
provided for this purpose. Slings, cables or chains should be adjusted to distribute the
load evenly. Never attempt to lift the equipment by light eyebolts fixed into covers or
thinner-walled housing sections.

Use only lifting equipment that is adequately maintained and that possesses sufficient
load carrying capacity for the particular application. Secure and balance the load
properly to prevent swinging during suspension.

When attaching slings to equipment, attention must be paid to the behaviour of the
sling under load. Do not attach a sling in a manner which will cause it to crush or rip
loose exterior piping or gauges when it is placed under load.

For more details about handling possibilities, refer to part C: “Installation procedure of
C150EF mechanisms in frame”

A-C150EF
PART B

GENERALITIES - DESCRIPTIONS Document

• Generalities B01

 General
B01-C150EF-1
 Performances

- C150EF mechanism
- Motor / brake

- Jacking system – Rig layout 10753140

- Jacking unit numbering 10753141

• Equipment description B02

 Mechanical equipments B02-150EF-A

 Electric equipments 10724498

10723794
79510598
10724074
79510486
10724075
79510599
3101119

10668519
10724585

ABR - 11/06/14 - Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-B-A

B01
09/10/13
B01 ABR
Rev. 01
GENERALITIES Fol 1/2

B01.1. GENERAL PRINCIPLE

The self elevating rig is fitted with three (3) triangular legs. On each leg are welded
three (3) racks.
Each rack meshes with six (6) pinions units mounted in a frame. Each frame takes
place in a jack house.
The jacking system is able to move the hull along the legs during floating and
elevating conditions.
It is able to:
• Lifting / lowering of the legs
• Lifting / lowering of the platform with normal elevated weight and with part
of the preload.
• Holding the elevated weight with maximum preload
Arrangement:
There are three (3) jacking assemblies for each leg, total nine (9) assemblies.
Each jacking assembly consists of six (6) pinions, each independently driven by an
electric motor through its gear trains. So there are 54 jacking units.
Pairs of pinions engage on opposed rack centers to balance horizontal spreading
forces between rack and pinions.
The assemblies are designed such that each pinion and motor can be removed for
inspection and repair.

B01.2. PERFORMANCES
• B01.2.1. C150EF mechanism

Metric Tons Per pinion Per Chord Per Leg

Normal Jacking (vertical push on rack) 340 MT 2,040 MT 6,120 MT
Maximum Jacking (vertical push on rack) 521 MT 3,126 MT 9,378 MT
Lifting speed 0,46 m/min 0,46 m/min 0,46 m/min
Static holding capacity 544 MT 3,264 MT 9,792 MT
ABS storm Holding 646 MT 3,876 MT 11,628 MT

B01-C150EF-1
09/10/13
B01 ABR
Rev. 01
GENERALITIES Fol 2/2

The BLM jacking unit produces a vertical push on the rack called “Effective Load on
Rack”.
The value indicated for this “Effective Load” takes into account the theoretical losses
due to the efficiency factor for rack and pinion meshing under adequate greasing
conditions.
In order to be able to go from the BLM “Effective Load on Rack” to the Buyer’s
“Effective Hull Weight Lifting Capacity”, the Buyer on its own will have to make the
appropriate determination and take into account the following factors:

- The weight of the rig.

- The ‘As built’ geometry and surface finish of the racks.
- The friction losses due to leg guiding in the hull structure.
- The effect of variation in location of the centre of gravity of the rig.
- The effect of the environmental conditions.

The BLM Jacking unit is designed for the following life cycle:

Normal jacking 500 H

Maximum jacking 55 H

Any variation of load on pinion will impact consequently the life of the jacking system.

Any lack of greasing / lubrication will reduce the life time of the rack and pinion /
jacking system.

The BLM Jacking is designed for elevating and lowering the hull, and to support the
hull during normal weather conditions. During drilling operations, severe weather and
tow conditions, the jacking system shall be released, and the legs are rigidly locked
to the hull with the rack chock system. It is understood that design an operation
practices cannot lead to an overload of the BLM Jacking Unit.

• B01.2.2. Motor/brake
See motor technical data sheet in part J : 10725180
• B01.2.3. Mechanisms numbering: See drawing 10753141
(Report sheet to be completed after installation of each equipment)

B01-C150EF-1
B02
09/10/13
B02 ABR
Rev. 01
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Fol 1/2

B02.1. RACK

The racks are made of high strength steel and welded by elements.

B02.2. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Each unit incorporates one reduction gear with a fully watertight fabricated casing.

B02-C150EF-A
09/10/13
B02 ABR
Rev. 01
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Fol 2/2

All gears are totally enclosed and splash lubricated.

The outlet pinion of reduction gear meshes with the rack.
All gear units are equipped with drain plug.
Gear cases are designed to be removable from supporting frame as single unit with motor
and main pinion.
Outline dimension:

B02.3. ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

The complete installation includes: (see drawing 10724498)

• 54 single speed electric motor brake BLM (18 per leg). The brake is provided with
manual release device and the shaft is provided with a 19 mm square end for manual
adjustments.
Each motor is equipped with current measurement. Each unit is equipped with a torque
measurement. Those measurements are used to give alarm.
• 3 separate motor control centers (1 per leg) (see drawing 10723794)
• 1 central control console (see drawing 79510598)
• 9 local control console (1 per chord) (see drawing 10724074)
• 1 brake release portable boxes (see drawing 79510486)
• 3 emergency jacking control chest (1 per leg) (see drawing 10724075)
• 1 PLC backup control chest (see drawing 79510599)
• 9 leg height detection systems (1 per chord) (see drawing 3101119)
• 3 resistor bank control chest (see drawing 10668519)
• 3 air cooled resistor (see drawing 10724585)

B02-C150EF-A
PART C
INSTALLATION Document

• Mechanical equipment installation C01

 Installation procedure 10725371

 General arrangement 10723903
 Mounting parts for jack frame 10724083
 Emergency unlocking of brake PMOT962
 Shim 10724587
 Shim 10724588
 Shim 10724589
 Dimensions C150EF (C.o.G) 10724071
 Jacking unit numbering 10753141
 Gear unit slinging 10725369
 Lubrication code 10895164
 Equipped valve 10861704
 Level hose 10861705
 Height detection 3101119

• Pinion Load Monitoring System installation (PLMS) C02

103242

• Electrical equipment installation C03

C03-150EF

 Locker gear 10723794

 Central console 79510598
 Local control consoles 10724074
 Portable box for brake release 79510486
 Emergency jacking control chest 10724075
 PLC backup control chest 79510599
 Leg height sensor 3101119

 Resistor bank control chest 10668519

 Air cooled resistor 10724585

 Electric wiring 10724498

• Starting up C04
C04-C150EF

 Master control cabinets and central console 10906931

 Auxiliary equipments 103478

• Full ride warning C05

C05-C150EF

ABR - 11/06/14 - Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-C-A

C01
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 1 / 10

1. Subject
This document defines the procedure for C150EF Gear units installation in the jacking frame.

Documents included:
 Checking the jacking frame dimensions before gear mounting
 Installation of the bushing
 Installation of C150EF gear unit
 Installation of shims
 Installation completion
 Tagging
 Oil Filling

2. Checking the jacking frame dimensions

This paragraph is to describe the dimensions to check on the jacking frame before mounting the C150EF jacking
gear units.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 2 / 10
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 3 / 10

3. Installation of the bushing

This paragraph is to describe the installation of the bushing in the jacking frame bore.

- Bushing is to be cooled with frozen carbon dioxide (CO2) at temperature -78°C before being inserted
in the jacking frame bore.

Do not use Liquid Nitrogen (it would damage the graphite inserts of the bushing)
Do not heat the frame for fitting

Bushing outside diameter = 440.18 / 440.24 mm

Jacking frame bore inside diameter = 440.03 / 440.09 mm
Shrinkage between bushing and frame bore: mini = 0.09 mm / maxi = 0.21 mm

- Insert the bushing from the inside of the jacking frame. Position it at 58.2 mm from the end before its
temperature goes back to ambient temperature.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 4 / 10

- Then insert the seal, the seal retainer and the screws.

4. Installation of C150EF gear unit

Jacking gear is inserted in the jacking frame as a shaft in a sleeve. Jacking torque is transmitted to the frame by
4 shims which transfer the load from the gear housing flange to the jacking frame stopper plates.
Shims are to be adjusted for each unit as per the procedure detailed in paragraph 5.

Each gear unit is supplied with a temporary protective cover at the pinion end for the load
sensor. Do not transport the unit without this cover.

IMPORTANT: This procedure describes gear unit fitting in horizontal position. The frames are already erected.
For the gear units installation, start with the lower level units.

 Mount both greased O-rings on sleeve and brush with grease the surface between both O-rings.

 Grease sleeve bore, main pinion end, frame and bearing.

NOTA: Grease used must be water resistant type and must NOT be MOS2 added type for bearing
greasing.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 5 / 10

 Sling the unit as per drawing 10725369 and insert it in the frame.

During mounting operation, it shall be necessary to rotate the 7 teeth pinion to make it matching the rack
teeth. To allow rotation, proceed as follows :

o Remove brake cover central plug to access the motor shaft square.
o Release mechanically the brake by using drawing Emergency Unlocking of Brake (PMOT962)
o Use the driving square to adjust pinion orientation.
o After adjustment, put back screws, spacers, gaskets and plug on brake.

The protective cover at pinion end is provided with an axial threaded hole to pull the unit. This one
allows pulling 3 tons horizontally. This one must NOT be used to lift the unit.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 6 / 10

 Once the unit is fully engaged, check the contact between jacking gear housing flange and frame.
Remove the protective cover at pinion end.

 Mount the remaining parts shown on drawing 10724083 (Mounting Parts for Jackframe).

 To place correctly the unit longitudinally, mount one hold-down screw in the eye located near the Shim 1.
Torque tightening is 60 daN.m. This screw is a provided with a shoulder. A gap of 2mm under the screw
head is provided.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 7 / 10

5. Installation of shims
5.1 Shims numbering

Shim 1 is a standard shim (same thickness for every units).

Shims 2, 3 and are to be adjusted to each unit.

This procedure is the same for units type A and type B.

Following this procedure will minimize overloading the frame stopper plates, the shims and the gear housing
flange and will optimize load equalizing.

5.2 Shim 1 fitting

 Shim is delivered with its final thickness. Fit it then place stop plate and screws.

5.3 Shim 4 fitting

 Lift unit to cancel gap (with a maximum lifting force of 10 MT) as shown.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 8 / 10

o Unit type A

o Unit type B
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 9 / 10

 Measure accurately clearance for the shim 4 (Required accuracy +/-0,2 mm).
 Machine one shim 10724589 to the measured clearance (Required tolerance 0/-0,2 mm).
 Fit it in place and mount its stop plate and its screws (See paragraph 5.2).
 Release the holding load. Unit is now supported only by shims 1 and 4. Final clearance can be 0,4 mm.
 Mount a second hold-down screw in the eye located near the Shim 4.

5.4 Shims 2 and 3 fitting

 Measure accurately clearance for the shims 2 and 3 (Required accuracy +/-0,2 mm).
 For shim 2, machine one shim 10724589 to the measured clearance (Required tolerance 0/-0,2 mm).
 For shim 3, machine shim 10724588 to the measured clearance (Required tolerance 0/-0,2 mm).
 Fit shims 2 and 3 in place and mount their stop plate and screws.
 Mount the 2 remaining hold-down screws in the eyes located near shims 2 and 3.

6. Installation completion

 Connect PLMS wires.

 Install the bleeding valve (as per drawing 10861704).

7. Tagging

Indicate clearly the number of each gear unit by tagging the back of the gearbox and also the frame on rack
pinion side. Tagging needs to be visible from the deck.
Date : 02/04/2014
N° : 10725371-PRO
C150EF Gear units installation procedure Revision : 02
Page : 10 / 10

8. Oil filling
Preliminary explanations :

C150EF gear units are made of 2 reduction gearboxes, one primary with straight gears and one
secondary with planetary gears. The 2 gearcases are not filled with the same lubricant. See Lubrication
code (drawing 10895164-LUB).

Oil filling is to be made with unit (in horizontal position) and after mounting it in frame.
Filling it before mounting in the frame would damage the bleeding valve.

 Select oils in accordance with Lubrication paragraph (refer to paragraph E1).

 Connect level hose 10861705 to the bleeding valve.

 Clean areas around the 2 filling plugs and remove all parts that may fall in the reduction gears.

 Open the primary gear box filling plug and the oil level plug.

 Fill with oil the primary gear case until oil reaches level plug, then close both plugs.

 Open the secondary gearbox filling plug and open the bleeding valve.

 Fill with oil the secondary gear case and hold the level hose in position as shown on drawing 10861705
until oil reaches the mark, then close the valve and the filling plug.

 Disconnect the level hose.

 Record the serial number of filled units.

 It is recommended to check oil levels after few rotations of the main pinion.
76 165
Ch. 2x30°

38
Ch. 1x30°
3.2 3.2

6 - 0,1
3.2

0
3.2

Ch. 2x30°
Ch. 3x45° Ch. 3x45°

- 0,1
= 20 - 0,2 =

Grinded or machined chamfers

Chanfreins meulés ou usinés

MATERIAL / MATIERE
DESIGNATION
S355K2+N 02 Dimension tolerances added
Issued for approval
03/10/13 ASO FMA
01 11/04/13 ASO FMA
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP
Re (Yield strength) ≥ 33.5 daN/mm² Machined surfaces unless otherwise
Unless otherwise specified edges will be rounded MACHINED DIMENSIONS WITHOUT 0 to / à 200 ±0,2 1001 to / à 2000 ±1
specified TOLERANCES
6.3 201 to / à 500 ±0,3 2001 to / à 4000 ±2
47 daN/mm² ≤ Rr (Ts) ≤ 63 daN/mm² Surfaces usinées sauf indications Sauf indications les arêtes vives seront arrondies COTE D'USINAGE SANS TOLERANCES 501 to / à 1000 ±0,5 > at / à 4000 ±3

≤ Hb ≤
A% (E per cent) ≥ 19 % SHIM BUTEE
SCA. :

RESILIENCE (Notch Impact)

MASS : 3.3 Kg ENS : P.S. : 6143117 ECH. : 1
Tests temperature NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
Temperature essais -20 °C BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]
Average 3 tests
Moyenne 3 essais KV > 40 J TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED
This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
FORMAT
A3
10724587 02 1/1
Individual minimum
Minimum individuelle KV > J The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines
Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite.
76 165

Ch. 2x30°

44
Ch. 1x30°
3.2 3.2

6 - 0,1
3.2

0
3.2

Ch. 2x30°
Ch. 3x45° Ch. 3x45°

- 0,1
= 20 - 0,2 =

Grinded or machined chamfers

Chanfreins meulés ou usinés

≤ Hb ≤
A% (E per cent) ≥ 19 % SHIM BUTEE
SCA. :

RESILIENCE (Notch Impact)

MASS : 3.9 Kg ENS : P.S. : 6143117 ECH. : 1
Tests temperature NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
Temperature essais -20 °C BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]
Average 3 tests
Moyenne 3 essais KV > 40 J TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED
This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
FORMAT
A3
10724588 02 1/1
Individual minimum
Minimum individuelle KV > J The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines
Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite.
76 165

Ch. 2x30°

71
Ch. 1x30°
3.2 3.2

6 - 0,1
3.2

0
3.2

Ch. 2x30°
Ch. 3x45° Ch. 3x45°

- 0,1
= 20 - 0,2 =

Grinded or machined chamfers

Chanfreins meulés ou usinés

MATERIAL / MATIERE
DESIGNATION
S355K2+N 02 Dimension tolerances added
Issued for approval
03/10/13 ASO FMA
01 11/04/13 ASO FMA
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP
Re (Yield strength) ≥ 32.5 daN/mm² Machined surfaces unless otherwise
Unless otherwise specified edges will be rounded MACHINED DIMENSIONS WITHOUT 0 to / à 200 ±0,2 1001 to / à 2000 ±1
specified TOLERANCES
6.3 201 to / à 500 ±0,3 2001 to / à 4000 ±2
47 daN/mm² ≤ Rr (Ts) ≤ 63 daN/mm² Surfaces usinées sauf indications Sauf indications les arêtes vives seront arrondies COTE D'USINAGE SANS TOLERANCES 501 to / à 1000 ±0,5 > at / à 4000 ±3

≤ Hb ≤
A% (E per cent) ≥ 18 % SHIM BUTEE
SCA. :

RESILIENCE (Notch Impact)

MASS : 6.6 Kg ENS : P.S. : 6143117 ECH. : 1
Tests temperature NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
Temperature essais -20 °C BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]
Average 3 tests
Moyenne 3 essais KV > 40 J TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED
This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
FORMAT
A3
10724589 02 1/1
Individual minimum
Minimum individuelle KV > J The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines
Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite.
30 30

31 31

32 32

33 36 33

34 35 34

EQUIPPED VALVE VANNE EQUIPEE

+10%
SCA. :
MASS : 1.3 Kg 0 ENS : P.S. : ECH. :

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR

BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10861704 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 07/02/14 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
A
A

Detail A
1 1

2 2

LEVEL HOSE TUYAU DE NIVEAU

+10%
SCA. :
MASS : 0.4 Kg 0 ENS : P.S. : ECH. :

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR

BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10861705 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 07/02/14 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
C02
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION N° 103242

PLMS
MOUNTING AND CALIBRATION

Diffusion : File
Date Visa Check Appr
Creation 17.11.04 DPA FMA
Ind. Chapters and parameters updating
A Explanations more detailed 12.10.05 FMA FMA
B Application to D88 05.09.06 NLE FMA
C Description of the installation updated 29/11/06 NLE FMA
D Wire connection and disclaimer 22/01/07 JMA FMA
E Added D60H wiring 29/06/07 TBO FMA
Calibration detail
F Change of thread locker type 11/01/08 FMA FMA
Text general update
Paragraph « calibration by current » deleted
G 28/01/08 FMA PCA
Addition of Loctite references
H Remove assembly drawing numbers 12/05/09 MGA FMA
I Replace nut by cotter pin 16/06/09 MGA FMA
Blank mounting updated with adhesive thread
J locker added. Collar flange 80N.m tightening 10/07/09 NLE FMA
added.

NLE – Ind. J – 10/07/09 SPEC n° 103242

PINION LOAD MONITORING SYSTEM (PLMS)
MOUNTING AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

CAUTION

This procedure is to be followed carefully, otherwise it will result in a destroyed sensor

DESCRIPTION

PLMS system Système PLMS

By the back of the pinion By the front of the pinion

Refer to assembly drawing for detail of the items.

MOUNTING PROCEDURE

Clean carefully the face of the pinion and the 6 taps M10. Check the thread by screwing
a M10 screw.

Proceed in 3 steps :

A / Read the procedure hereafter to get a good understanding of the final mounting.

B / Proceed first to a blank mounting to check the final backlash

C / Proceed to final mounting

A / READING OF THE PROCEDURE

Read the procedure till the end to understand the different steps.

NLE – Ind. J – 10/07/09 SPEC n° 103242

B / GAP CHECKING

The purpose is to use the adhesive thread locker drying time to check the 3 to 5 mm gap
between the PLMS and the fixation area.
Follow the steps B.1 to B.4 below:

B.1 : Check there is no scraps in the female and male threads.

The most important is to clean well and degrease the all threads.

Assemble the adaptor on the pipe with medium adhesive thread locker (Loctite® 243,
Loctite® 262 or equivalent).

B.2 : Engage the pipe to the pre-mounted male stub, installed on the bottom of the
pinion, and tighten it with medium adhesive thread locker (Loctite® 243, Loctite® 262 or
equivalent).

NLE – Ind. J – 10/07/09 SPEC n° 103242

B.3 : Fit with medium adhesive thread locker (Loctite® 243, Loctite® 262 or equivalent)
the PLMS sensor axis inside the threaded shaft, manually screw and tighten the PLMS.

B.4 : When the tightening becomes hard, The gap between the PLMS and the fixation
area must be from 3 to 5mm.

Check the gap

from 3 to 5
mm

NLE – Ind. J – 10/07/09 SPEC n° 103242

B.5 If the gap of 3 to 5 mm is not actual, add spacer washers between stub adaptor and
connection pipe according following procedure :

B.5.1 Unscrew the PLMS from the connection pipe,

B.5.2 Unscrew the stub adaptor from the connection pipe,
B.5.3 Add between 1 and 3 spacer washers between stub adaptor and connection
pipe depending on the adjustment to perform,
B.5.4 Mount the pipe + washer + adaptor assembly on the pinion,
B.5.5 Make a new blank mounting to check the proper adjustment of the gap.

.
C / FINAL MOUNTING

C.1 : When the gap is obtained, let the assembly in place.

C.2 : Then, unscrew carefully the locking screw until its drilling (2.5mm diameter) come out
to insert the cotter pin. Insert the cotter pin. The locking screw must not be screwed with
thread locker.

cotter pin

locking screw

Once this locking screw is disengaged :

- DO NOT TURN THE PLMS
- DO NOT PULL THE PLMS

NLE – Ind. J – 10/07/09 SPEC n° 103242

C.3 Push carefully on the PLMS
sensor until it comes in contact
with the face of the pinion. It
must be naturally centered into
place.

C.4 Fit the collar flange on the

PLMS. And first tighten the
screws manually prior to make
the zero adjustment of the
sensor. PLMS must be free in
rotation.

D / ZERO CALIBRATION OF THE SENSOR

Note: this calibration is to be made with NO LOAD on the pinion. If this calibration is made
on board, it will be made on one pinion only. Each pinion shall be loaded back after
calibration, prior to proceed with a next pinion.

Calibration by tension measurement :

1. Connect a 24 V DC supply to the PLMS (terminal + and -). Connect a 500 Ohms load
resistance in parallel between terminal O volt and the Measure.
2. Connect a volt meter to the PLMS terminal (terminal M and -)
3. Adjust the angular position of the PLMS sensor to obtain : 0 V +/ - 0.25 V
4. Tighten the collar flange locking screws gradually (by crossing method) and check the
measure is still inside the calibration range
5. Mount the bearing cover plate onto the PLMS sensor

Wire must be connected straight and tended to the junction box, to avoid any wire’s
twist on the PLMS during jacking operations.

In no case NOV/BLM will accept responsibility for any damage or accident resulting
from a bad connection or wire’s twist

NLE – Ind. J – 10/07/09 SPEC n° 103242

C03
14/10/13
C03 ABR
Rev. 01
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Fol 1/4

WARNINGS

Wiring

Control devices must be switch off before insulation control. (Risk of destruction).

Wire and hoses are not physically marked; please refer to assembly drawings for
their designation.

Central control console

In order to avoid a premature ageing of the display screens, it is necessary to protect

them from a direct sun exposition.

Display screens have been carefully checked before the equipment left NOV-BLM
facilities. Therefore any scratch detected on board cannot be charged to NOV-BLM.

Electric equipments

Bulbs and lights have been carefully checked and tested before the equipment left
NOV-BLM facilities. Therefore any failure detected on board cannot be charged to
NOV-BLM.

Any welding operation close to the electrical units is strictly forbidden (important risk
of equipment damages).

Electrical units have been design to withstand statutory over-voltage levels; any
higher voltage may induce equipment failures

Electrical units have been design to withstand statutory vibrations level, any over
stress may induce equipment failures.

C03-C150EF
14/10/13
C03 ABR
Rev. 01
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Fol 2/4

C03.1. LOCKERS GEAR (drawing 10723794)

The lockers gears are completely equipped and are placed in sheltered room on the
platform.
NOTA: The lockers gears are delivered with obturated plates. These plates must be
perforated in order to assemble the cable glands. Cable glands are not included in
NOV-BLM supply.

C03.2. CENTRAL CONSOLE (drawing 79510598)

The console is completely equipped and is placed in a jacking control room.

NOTA: The console is delivered with obturated plates. These plates must be
perforated in order to assemble the cable glands. The cable glands are not included
in NOV-BLM supply.

C03.3. LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLES (drawing 10724074)

The consoles are delivered completely equipped with cable glands and mounted at
each leg near jacking units.

C03.4. PORTABLE BOX FOR BRAKE RELEASE (drawing 79510486)

The brake releases are delivered completely equipped as per drawing.

C03.5. LEG HEIGHT INDICATOR (drawing 3101119)

On each chord, the height sensor will be positioned and welded as shown on the
drawing 3101119. We suggest to install it above passageway (2 meters from the top
of the jacking frame) to avoid interference with the rack and the guides greasing.

Adjust the spring tension by tightening the screw to put the idle pinion in contact
against the rack. The pinion will remain in contact against the rack whatever is the
position of the leg in the hull.

C03-C150EF
14/10/13
C03 ABR
Rev. 01
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Fol 3/4

View of a typical installation, on top of jack frame

C03-C150EF
14/10/13
C03 ABR
Rev. 01
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION Fol 4/4

C03.6. ELECTRIC WIRING

The shipyard will carry out electric wiring between the different main equipments:

• Power / locker gears

• Locker gears / electric motors (including brakes and safeties)
• Locker gears / local control console
• Locker gears / rack chock position detection
• Locker gears / central console
• Central console / load measure
• Central console / length measure
• Central console / board computer

The cable list is detailed on one line diagram.

NOTA: NOV-BLM supplies do not include the wiring between the different
equipments.

C03-C150EF
C04
14/10/13
C04 ABR
Rev.01
STARTING UP Fol 1/1

C04.1. Preliminary verifications

• Oil level
• Make sure that the racks are properly well lubricated for the start of meshing.
In the opposite case, perform brush lubrications.
• Perform visual control of entire installation.

C04.2. Adjustments and checking

Make sure that the racks dimensions had been controlled.

Before starting up, verify the good rotating direction for all motors, one after the other
one.

C04.3. Starting up

Use of instruction:
• Make sure that the generators are running.
• Check the tension and frequency.
• Verify that motor circuit breaker is on energised position.
• Verify that locker heating circuit breaker is on energised position.
• Verify that all auxiliaries circuit breaker are on energised position.
• Put the key switch « CONSOLE POWER » in « ON » and push the button « TEST
LAMP » (all pilot lights of console should be kindle).
• Verify that any defect is detected.
• Verify the balancing load on motors.
• The control leg is ready.
• See the different methods in chapter D « OPERATION ».
• In case of emergency, press the « EMERGENCY STOP » button (the 3 legs are
stopped).

C04-C150EF
NOV-BLM
15, rue de la Métallurgie
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX
France
Phone : 33 2 40 68 36 00
Fax : 33 2 40 68 36 10 / 22
[Link] : blm@[Link]

PRE COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

C150EF JACKING UNITS

ISSUED CHKD APPD

REV DESCRIPTION DATE DATE DATE
BY BY BY
01 FIRST RELEASE VGA 22/04/2014 PCA 22/04/2014 FMA 22/04/2014
02 UPDATED VGA 04/07/2014 PCA 04/07/2014 FMA 04/07/2014

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 1 / 39

1. Summary

1. SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................................. 2

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION COMPLETION CHECKING ............................................................................ 3

3. OUTSIDE WIRING COMPLETION CHECKING (USE OUTSIDE WIRING DIAGRAM) ........................................ 3

4. CONTACTOR SEQUENCE CHECKING ......................................................................................................... 3

4.1. FIRST CHECKING ON ALL JACKING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENTS .................................................................................. 4

4.2. ON THE CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE: ........................................................................................................... 5
4.3. ON THE PLC BACK UP CONTROL CHEST ......................................................................................................... 5
4.4. ON THE FWD MCC .................................................................................................................................. 6
4.5. ON THE PORT MCC................................................................................................................................. 7
4.6. ON THE STBD MCC ................................................................................................................................. 8
4.7. NETWORK STARTING ................................................................................................................................. 9
4.8. FROM THE CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE AND FWD MCC ................................................................................. 10
4.9. FROM THE CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE AND PORT MCC ................................................................................ 12
4.10. FROM THE CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE AND STBD MCC ............................................................................... 14
4.11. FROM THE ELT CONTROL CHEST ON FWD LEG ............................................................................................ 16
4.12. FROM THE ELT CONTROL CHEST ON PORT LEG ........................................................................................... 17
4.13. FROM THE ELT CONTROL CHEST ON STBD LEG ........................................................................................... 18
4.14. FROM THE EMERGENCY JACKING CONSOLE ON FWD LEG ............................................................................... 19
4.15. FROM THE EMERGENCY JACKING CONSOLE ON PORT LEG .............................................................................. 20
4.16. FROM THE EMERGENCY JACKING CONSOLE ON STBD LEG .............................................................................. 21

5. REAL CONDITION CHECKING ................................................................................................................. 22

5.1. FWD LEG............................................................................................................................................ 22

5.2. PORT LEG........................................................................................................................................... 28
5.3. STBD LEG ........................................................................................................................................... 34

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 2 / 39

2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION COMPLETION CHECKING

We recommend to the shipyard to follow the installation procedure and to issue a mechanical
completion report including tables showing:
- The location of the jacking units with their serial numbers,
- The oil level checking completion dates with names of operators,
- The torque tightening completion dates with names of operators.
- Other records as applicable according to the type of Jacking units such as the gap between the
fixation screws and the jacking units and the brake screws status.

The service engineer must collect the signed shipyard report and check by discussion with
the shipyard if points are missing or if there are any difficulties to solve.

3. OUTSIDE WIRING COMPLETION CHECKING (use outside wiring diagram)

The shipyard should:

- Check continuity, insulation and connexion to earth.
- Check connections and marking.
- Issue an electrical completion report.

Service engineer must collect the signed shipyard report and check by discussion with the
shipyard if points are missing (PLMS, RPD, limit switches, control console heater supply…).

Note: It is not safe and it is time consuming to proceed with missing points but shipyard may decide to
do it and adapted actions must be taken (Disconnect and insulate the wires, jump if necessary).

4. CONTACTOR SEQUENCE CHECKING

The purpose of these checks is to make sure that the control is operational by functional tests
without power on the motors.

Use MCC, central control console, PLC back up electrical diagram

Check with the shipyard that the power supplies are available and correct; locate, for information, the
breakers on the shipyard distribution boards.

Warning: for all operations inside electrical equipment:

Identify where are the parts with voltage.
All protections against the electric risk are installed, if not use appropriate equipments.
Make sure that there is no dangerous voltage with appropriate equipments before to connect
or disconnect component or wire.

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 3 / 39

4.1. First checking on all jacking electrical equipments

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Make sure that all power supplies are off for all jacking system
equipments
2 Make sure that all circuit breakers on the FWD MCC are off

3 Macke sure that all circuits breakers on the PORT MCC are off

4 Make sure that all circuits breakers on the STBD MCC are off

5 Make sure that all circuits breakers on the Central Control Console are off
Push on the Emergency Stop Mushroom button
6 Make sure that all circuits breakers on the PLC Back up Control chest are
off
7 Make sure that all circuits breakers on the FWD Resistor Bank Control
Chest are OFF
8 Make sure that all circuits breakers on the FWD Resistor Bank Control
Chest are OFF
9 Make sure that all circuits breakers on the FWD Resistor Bank Control
Chest are OFF
10 Push on the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom button on the FWD
emergency Jacking Local Console
11 Push on the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom button on the PORT
Emergency Jacking Local Console
12 Push on the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom button on the STBD
emergency Jacking Local Console

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 4 / 39

4.2. On the Central Control Console:

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Make sure that the central control console power switch is in off position.
Push on the emergency stop button.
Make sure that the inclination override switch is in off position
Make sure that the “Main / Back up PLC” switch is in MAIN position
2 Make sure that all breakers are off.
Check the circuit breaker ratings
3 Check the encoder switch on the Ethernet I/O modulus ( see Central
Control Console electrical drawing)
Check the IP address tag on each component
Check if the battery is properly installed.
4 Switch the power on from the shipyard distribution board
Check that voltage is correct
5 Switch on the “CONTROL 220V” circuit breaker
Turn the central control console power switch on the “display only”
position
Check the LED status on the PLC (RUN : fixed I/O : fixed because MCC
are off)
Check the software revision displayed on the screen setting page
Download the last software revision if require.
6 Check the lamps are illuminated and the buzzer ring out when you Push
on the “LAMPS TEST” button
7 Set the inclination rig threshold
Check and adjust temporarily the inclination device
Switch on the inclination override and check the signal override
8 Switch on the “HEATING SUPPLY” circuit breaker
Check the heater
9 Switch off the Central Control Console
Go to PLC Back Up Control Chest

4.3. On the PLC Back Up Control Chest

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Make sure that all breakers are off.
Check the circuit breaker ratings
2 Check the IP address tag on each component
Check if the battery is properly installed
3 Switch the power on from the shipyard distribution board
Check that voltage is correct
4 Switch on the “CONTROL 220V” circuit breaker
Check the LED status on the PLC (RUN : fixed I/O : fixed because MCC
are off)
If PLC software on the Central Control Console was updated, download
the same revision on the Back Up PLC
5 Switch on the “HEATING SUPPLY” circuit breaker
Check the heater
6 Switch off the PLC Back Up
Go to the MCC

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 5 / 39

4.4. On the FWD MCC
CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check that all protection against electrical shock are installed
If not, use appropriate protective equipment
2 Make sure that all breakers are off.
Check there are no voltage on the circuits with appropriate equipments
Check the circuit breaker ratings
Check the thermal relay settings (ratings and auto-reset selected)
3 Disconnect all brake coils
Check the resistor value (around 5 Ohms)
Connect the coils
4 Disconnect each thermistor
Check the resistor value ( around 220 Ohms)
Connect each thermistor
5 Disconnect each Heating Resistor
Check the resistor value (around 390 Ohms)
Connect each Heating Resistor
6 Disconnect “M” and “-“ from load sensor on the MCC terminals
Check the resistor value ( around 19.9 kOhms)
7 Check the encoder switch on the Ethernet I/O modulus
Check all I/O modulus are correctly plugged on the rack
Check on the Ethernet switch that the Standby switch is on and the RM
switch is off
8 Simulate with strap, “motor circuit breaker” digital inputs activated and
“brake transformer circuit breaker” digital inputs activated.
9 Make sure that all circuit breakers are off
Switch the power on from the shipyard distribution board
Check voltage, frequency, and phase rotation
10 Switch on the “HEATING SUPPLY” circuit breaker
Check the voltage
Switch on the “FAN AND HEATING” circuit breakers
Check the heating resistor currents and lamp
Switch on the “ MOTOR HEATING” circuit breakers
Check the heating resistor currents
11 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that Brake Supply circuit breaker is off
Switch on the “MAIN CONTROL” circuit breaker
Check the voltage on the circuit breakers supplied by the MAIN
CONTROL circuit breaker
Switch on the “POWER MEASURE” circuit breaker
Check the primary and secondary voltage on the transformer
Switch on the “CONTROL” circuit breaker
Check the primary and secondary voltage on the transformer
12 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that Brake Supply circuit breaker is off
Switch on the “CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
Check the RM relay is not energized. If not, solve this trouble.
Switch on the “LOAD SENSOR SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
13 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that brake supply circuit breaker is off
Make sure that “CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker is off
Disconnect the RM relay coil
Disconnect the supply plug on the two Ethernet I/O modulus
Close and lock MCC doors
Go to another MCC

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 6 / 39

4.5. On the PORT MCC
CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check that all protection against electrical shock are installed
If not, use appropriate protective equipment
2 Make sure that all breakers are off.
Check there are no voltage on the circuits with appropriate equipments
Check the circuit breaker ratings
Check the thermal relay settings (ratings and auto-reset selected)
3 Disconnect all brake coils
Check the resistor value (around 5 Ohms)
Connect the coils
4 Disconnect each thermistor
Check the resistor value ( around 220 Ohms)
Connect each thermistor
5 Disconnect each Heating Resistor
Check the resistor value (around 390 Ohms)
Connect each Heating Resistor
6 Disconnect “M” and “-“ from load sensor on the MCC terminals
Check the resistor value ( around 19.9 kOhms)
7 Check the encoder switch on the Ethernet I/O modulus
Check all I/O modulus are correctly plugged on the rack
Check on the Ethernet switch that the Standby switch is on and the RM
switch is off
8 Simulate with strap, “motor circuit breaker” digital inputs activated and
“brake transformer circuit breaker” digital inputs activated.
9 Make sure that all circuit breakers are off
Switch the power on from the shipyard distribution board
Check voltage, frequency, and phase rotation
10 Switch on the “HEATING SUPPLY” circuit breaker
Check the voltage
Switch on the “FAN AND HEATING” circuit breakers
Check the heating resistor currents and lamp
Switch on the “ MOTOR HEATING” circuit breakers
Check the heating resistor currents
11 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that Brake Supply circuit breaker is off
Switch on the “MAIN CONTROL” circuit breaker
Check the voltage on the circuit breakers supplied by the MAIN
CONTROL circuit breaker
Switch on the “POWER MEASURE” circuit breaker
Check the primary and secondary voltage on the transformer
Switch on the “CONTROL” circuit breaker
Check the primary and secondary voltage on the transformer
12 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that Brake Supply circuit breaker is off
Switch on the “CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
Check the RM relay is not energized. If not, solve this trouble.
Switch on the “LOAD SENSOR SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
13 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that brake supply circuit breaker is off
Make sure that “CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker is off
Disconnect the RM relay coil
Disconnect the supply plug on the two Ethernet I/O modulus
Close and lock MCC doors
Go to another MCC

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 7 / 39

4.6. On the STBD MCC
CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check that all protection against electrical shock are installed
If not, use appropriate protective equipment
2 Make sure that all breakers are off.
Check there are no voltage on the circuits with appropriate equipments
Check the circuit breaker ratings
Check the thermal relay settings (ratings and auto-reset selected)
3 Disconnect all brake coils
Check the resistor value (around 5 Ohms)
Connect the coils
4 Disconnect each thermistor
Check the resistor value ( around 220 Ohms)
Connect each thermistor
5 Disconnect each Heating Resistor
Check the resistor value (around 390 Ohms)
Connect each Heating Resistor
6 Disconnect “M” and “-“ from load sensor on the MCC terminals
Check the resistor value ( around 19.9 kOhms)
7 Check the encoder switch on the Ethernet I/O modulus
Check all I/O modulus are correctly plugged on the rack
Check on the Ethernet switch that the Standby switch is on and the RM
switch is off
8 Simulate with strap, “motor circuit breaker” digital inputs activated and
“brake transformer circuit breaker” digital inputs activated.
9 Make sure that all circuit breakers are off
Switch the power on from the shipyard distribution board
Check voltage, frequency, and phase rotation
10 Switch on the “HEATING SUPPLY” circuit breaker
Check the voltage
Switch on the “FAN AND HEATING” circuit breakers
Check the heating resistor currents and lamp
Switch on the “ MOTOR HEATING” circuit breakers
Check the heating resistor currents
11 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that Brake Supply circuit breaker is off
Switch on the “MAIN CONTROL” circuit breaker
Check the voltage on the circuit breakers supplied by the MAIN
CONTROL circuit breaker
Switch on the “POWER MEASURE” circuit breaker
Check the primary and secondary voltage on the transformer
Switch on the “CONTROL” circuit breaker
Check the primary and secondary voltage on the transformer
12 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that Brake Supply circuit breaker is off
Switch on the “CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
Check the RM relay is not energized. If not, solve this trouble.
Switch on the “LOAD SENSOR SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
13 Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that brake supply circuit breaker is off
Make sure that “CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker is off
Disconnect the RM relay coil
Disconnect the supply plug on the two Ethernet I/O modulus
Close and lock MCC doors
Go to another MCC

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 8 / 39

4.7. Network starting
CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 For each MCC
Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that brake supply circuit breaker is off
Make sure that “CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker is off
Make sure that RM relay coil is disconnected
Make sure that the supply plug on the two Ethernet I/O modulus are
unplugged
Make sure that MCC doors are locked
2 Make sure that all EMERGENCY STOP mushroom are push

3 Switch on the PLC Back up Control Chest

4 Turn the central control console power switch on the “display only”
position
Check the status leds on the Ethernet switch
Fiber port 1: LNK green fixed, ACT orange flashing
Fiber port 2: LNK green low flashing, ACT off
If not, solve the trouble on the fiber loop

5 If one fiber Ethernet switch is missing, indentify the fiber Ethernet way on
the network drawing.
Check on each fiber Ethernet switch, the fiber port status led.
If fiber port is used the status leds are: LNK green fixed, ACT orange
flashing
NOTA: the MCC without Ethernet communication with the Central
Control consol, can not be pre commissioning

The network starting is essential step. Do not continue the pre commissioning if the network
starting is not done.

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 9 / 39

4.8. From the central control console and FWD MCC

One technician must go to FWD MCC and another one must go to the Central Control Console

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Make sure that network starting is done
Make sure that all EMERGENCY STOP mushroom are push
2 On this MCC
Make sure that motor circuit breakers are off
Make sure that brake supply circuit breaker is off
Make sure that “CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker is off
Make sure that RM relay coil is disconnected
Make sure that the supply plug on the two Ethernet I/O modulus are
unplugged
Switch off the “CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
3 On this MCC,
Connect the RM relay coil
Switch on the “CONTROL SUPPLY 24VDC circuit breaker
Check the RM relay is on when all emergency stop is released and the
RM relay is off when one emergency stop is pushed
Do not continue the pre commissioning if the point is not correct
4 Push on the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom button
Turn the central control console power switch on the “ON” position
5 On this MCC, plug the two supply Ethernet I/O modulus
Check on the screen, that the MCC status change from “MCC OFF” to
“FAULT”
Check that the digital outputs on the I/O modulus are off
Do not continue the pre commissioning if the point is not correct.
Solve the Ethernet communication trouble
6 Release the EMERGENCY STOP
Acknowledge
Check on the screen, that the MCC status is “MCC READY”
Check that the digital outputs on the I/O modulus are off
If not, solve the trouble
7 On this MCC, switch on the CONTROL 220VAC circuit breaker
Check the voltage
8 Retorquing contactors sequences checking:

Check RM is on and other contactors are off

Push on “ RETORQUING MODE” button
Check that AT1 contactor is off
Display the leg page on the screen
Push on “0%” button, on the screen
Push on “motor ..” button, on the screen
Check that “UP” contactor of motor selected is on and the others are off
Push on “ PUSH TO RETORQUE” button, on the screen
Check “..F1” and “..F2” contactor of motor selected is on and the others
are off
After about 3sec the sequence stops
Check that brake fault alarm appear
Check the sequence for all motor

Push on “30%” button, on the screen

Check the AT8 contactor is on
Push on “ PUSH TO RETORQUE” button, on the screen
Check that Lack of current alarm appear
Repeat for all torque, 60%, 80%, 100%, 120% and 140% and check that
corresponding contactor AT7, 6, 5, 4, 3 are on

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 10 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
9 Jacking contactor sequences checking:

Push on “CENTRAL MODE” button

Check “AT1” contactor is on
Push on “Hull Up” button
Check that all UP contactors are on and Fans are running
Check that Lack of current appear for all motors
Brakes contactors will not on due to lack of current alarms
All contactors are off due to the alarms
RM relay is on because it shutdown only with emergency stop

Push on Hull Up button

Check that all “UP” contactors are on and Fans are running
Quickly Push on “STOP” button
Check that all “UP” contactors are off

Do the same test with “Hull Down” button. Same sequence is expected (
DOWN contactors are on instead UP)
10 Switch off “ CONTROL 220VAC” circuit breaker
Close and lock the MCC Doors
Go to other MCC

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 11 / 39

4.9. From the central control console and PORT MCC

One technician must go to PORT MCC and another one must go to the Central Control Console

Check RM is on and other contactors are off

Push on “30%” button, on the screen

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 12 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
9 Jacking contactor sequences checking:

Push on “CENTRAL MODE” button

Push on Hull Up button

Check that all “UP” contactors are on and Fans are running
Quickly Push on “STOP” button
Check that all “UP” contactors are off

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 13 / 39

4.10. From the central control console and STBD MCC

One technician must go to STBD MCC and another one must go to the Central Control Console

Check RM is on and other contactors are off

Push on “30%” button, on the screen

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 14 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
9 Jacking contactor sequences checking:

Push on “CENTRAL MODE” button

Push on Hull Up button

Check that all “UP” contactors are on and Fans are running
Quickly Push on “STOP” button
Check that all “UP” contactors are off

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 15 / 39

4.11. From the ELT Control Chest on FWD leg

One technician should stay at the central console, select local mode and release emergency stop. One
technician should stay at the MCC. One technician should stay at the ELT console

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Switch on ELT Local Control Chest
Check the light “local on” is lit

2 Press EMERGENCY STOP on the Central Control Console

Check the light “LOCAL ON” is off
3 Release EMERGENCY STOP
Check that the brake contactors are on, when the brake is selected and
released button is pushed
4 Push on “ELT HULL UP” button
Check that the AT5 and AT2 contactors are on
Check that the UP contactor from corresponding chord are on
“Lack of current” alarm should appear on the central console
All contactors are off due to the alarms
RM relay is on because it shutdown only with emergency stop
Acknowledge the alarms
5 Push on “ELT LEG UP” button
Check that the AT8 and AT2 contactors are on
Check that the DOWN contactor from corresponding chord are on
“Lack of current” alarm should appear on the central console
All contactors are off due to the alarms
RM relay is on because it shutdown only with emergency stop
Acknowledge the alarms
6 Repeat this sequence for all ELT Control Chest

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 16 / 39

4.12. From the ELT Control Chest on PORT leg

One technician should stay at the central console, select local mode and release emergency stop. One
technician should stay at the MCC. One technician should stay at the ELT console

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Switch on ELT Local Control Chest
Check the light “local on” is lit

2 Press EMERGENCY STOP on the Central Control Console

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 17 / 39

4.13. From the ELT Control Chest on STBD leg

One technician should stay at the central console, select local mode and release emergency stop. One
technician should stay at the MCC. One technician should stay at the ELT console

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Switch on ELT Local Control Chest
Check the light “local on” is lit

2 Press EMERGENCY STOP on the Central Control Console

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 18 / 39

4.14. From the Emergency Jacking Console on FWD leg

The central console should be powered off. Emergency stop should be released. One technician
should stay at the central console (for safety). One technician should stay at the MCC. One technician
should stay at the Emergency jacking console.

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Make sure that network starting is done
Make sure that PLC BACKUP Control Chest is supplied
2 Switch on Emergency Jacking Console
Check the light “LOCAL ON” is lit
3 Jacking contactor sequences checking:

Check “AT1” contactor is on

5. REAL CONDITION CHECKING

5.1. FWD LEG

For this test 3 technicians are required: 1 at Jacking control panel, 1 at MCC, 1 near the concerned
jacking unit, all with communication means

Warning: Consider the mechanical consequence of each operation

Warning: The rig must be moved during this test. If it is not possible to move the rig/leg, all
tests are impossible.
Make sure those MCCs doors are closed before to operate (as parks may appear from main
contactors)

Warning for all operations inside electrical equipment:

Identify where is the part with voltage.
All protections against the electric risk are installed. If not use appropriate equipments
Make sure that there is no dangerous voltage with appropriate equipments before to connect
or disconnect component or wire.

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Brake release control checking

On the Central Control Console, select the local mode

On ELT Control Chest, plug the button box
Select one brake and Push on “RELEASE”
Check that the selected brake is released
Check on the MCC the brake voltage
Check on the MCC that the selected I/O modulus brake released input is
on

Do these operations for all brakes

2 Retorquing mode checking

On the Central Control Console, select the retorquing mode

Display the leg page on the screen
Push on “0%” button, on the screen
Push on “motor ..” button, on the screen
Push on “ PUSH TO RETORQUE” button, on the screen
Check that the selected brake is released
Push on “30%” button, on the screen
Push on “ PUSH TO RETORQUE” button, on the screen
Check that the selected motor must turn in HULL UP direction
Direction must be confirmed and recorded
If pinion rotation is not significant, push on upper percentage
Check each load with load sensor

Repeat for each jacking unit

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 22 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
3 Central mode checking

Make sure that Rack Chock are disengaged

On the Central Control Console, select the Central mode
Push on “HULL DOWN /LEG UP”
Check that the leg is going up
Check the current and load on the screens for each jacking units
Push on “STOP”
Check that the leg stops
Apply the same procedure for down

4 Emergency jacking console

Switch on the Central Control Console

Switch on the emergency jacking console
Push on “HULL DOWN /LEG UP”
Check that the leg is going up
Check the current and load on the screens for each jacking units
Push on “STOP”
Check that the leg stops
Apply the same procedure for down

Switch off the Central Control Console

Push on “HULL DOWN /LEG UP”
Check that the leg is going up
Check the current and load on the screens for each jacking units
Push on “STOP”
Check that the leg stops
Apply the same procedure for down

5 Local mode checking ( ELT function)

On the Central Control Console, select Local mode

Push on “ELT HULL UP”
Check that hull is going up for this chord ( during around 3 seconds)
Push on “ELT LEG UP”
Check that leg is going up for this chord ( during around 3 seconds)

7 Load sensor setting and record values

8 Auxiliary equipment
(see specific pre-commissioning)

9 Alarms testing:

Emergency Stop
Push on “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom button
Check that the alarms appear and all leg moves are stopped
Release “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom button
Acknowledge

Rack chock status: engaged

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact closed and rack chock
disengaged contact open
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 23 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
Rack chock status: Check the rack chock status
Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact closed and rack chock
disengaged contact closed
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact open and rack chock disengaged
contact open
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

On the screen, push on the message rack chock status

Check that override message appears
Check that the leg move it is possible

Rack chock status: disengaged

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact open and rack chock disengaged
contact close
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is possible

Leg: High limit stop

Disconnect the high limit stop sensor
Check the message appears
Check hull up function is disable
On the screen push on the message
Check the message “override is appears
Check that hull up function is possible

Leg: Low limit stop

Disconnect the low limit stop sensor
Check the message appears
Check hull down function is disable
On the screen push on the message
Check the message “override is appears
Check that hull down function is possible

Warning Excessive inclination

Select the central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
Push on the inclinometer panel for simulate excessive inclination
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops

Stop Excessive inclination

Select the central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
Push on the inclinometer panel for simulate excessive inclination
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops

Desk: I/O modulus fault

Select central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
On the desk , unplug one I/O modulus from the rack
Check that the alarm appear and the leg stops
Plug the I/O modulus
Acknowledge

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 24 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
Brake circuit breaker: tripped
Shutdown the brake circuit breaker
Check that alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Switch on the brake circuit breaker
Acknowledge

Brake: fault
Disconnect one brake switch
Push on “HULL UP” or “HULL DOWN”
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the brake switch

Brake: manually released

Install a strap on motor brake switch terminals
Check that the warning appears

Motor: overheating
Disconnect one thermistor
Check that alarm appears
Check the leg move is possible
Reconnect the thermistor
Acknowledge

Motor: circuit breaker tripped

Shutdown one motor circuit breaker
Check that the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Switch on the motor circuit breaker
Acknowledge

Motor: Lack of current

Disconnect one motor current converter
Push on “HULL UP” or “HULL DOWN”
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the motor current converter

Motor: Overload:
Replace one motor current converter by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate nominal current with the generator
Push on “HULL UP” or ”HULL DOWN”
Simulate the overload current
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the motor current converter

Autotransformer: overheating
Disconnect one thermo contact (SL1 SL2 SL4)
Check that the warning appears
Select central mode and check that the hull up or down function is
available
Select retorquing mode and check that retorquing function is disable.
Reconnect the thermo contact
Acknowledge

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 25 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
Thermal relays: fault
Install a strap on the “RT.” Thermal relay contact (97-98)
Check that the warning appears
Select central mode and check that the hull up or down function is
available
Select retorquing mode and check that retorquing function is disable.
Remove the strap
Acknowledge

AT. Contactor Fault

Disconnect the AT1 contactor coil
Select central mode
Check the alarm appears
Reconnect the AT1 contactor coil
Acknowledge
Simulate AT1 auxiliary contactor contact
Select Retorquing
Check the alarm appears
Remove AT1 auxiliary contactor contact

Disconnect the AT2 contactor coil

Select Retorquing mode
Display leg page on the screen
Push on “PUSH TO RETORQUE”
Check the alarm appears
Reconnect the AT2 contactor coil
Acknowledge
Simulate AT2 auxiliary contactor contact
Select Central mode
Check the alarm appears
Remove AT2 auxiliary contactor contact
Repeat this sequence for AT3 AT4 AT5 AT6 AT7 AT8

MCC: Emergency stop

Disconnect the RM relay coil
Check the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Reconnect the RM relay coil
Acknowledge

MCC: I/O Modulus Fault

Unplug one I/O modulus from the rack
Check the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Plug the I/O modulus from the rack

MCC: insulation fault

Push on the test button on the insulation controller
Check the warning appears

MCC: OFF
Unplug the Ethernet cable on Ethernet I/O modulus
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Plug the cable

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 26 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
Redondancy network fault
Push on “HULL UP”
On the desk disconnect one fiber port
Check the warning appears
On the desk disconnect the another fiber port
Check that the leg stop
Check the message MCC: OFF appears

Pinion: load > ABS storm value

Replace one load sensor by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate pinion load sensor is higher than 646T
Check the message appear

Load sensor: Fault

Replace one load sensor by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate 20mA
Check the message appears

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 27 / 39

5.2. PORT LEG

For this test 3 technicians are required: 1 at Jacking control panel, 1 at MCC, 1 near the concerned
jacking unit, all with communication means

Warning: Consider the mechanical consequence of each operation

Warning for all operations inside electrical equipment:

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Brake release control checking

On the Central Control Console, select the local mode

Do these operations for all brakes

2 Retorquing mode checking

On the Central Control Console, select the retorquing mode

Repeat for each jacking unit

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 28 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
3 Central mode checking

Make sure that Rack Chock are disengaged

4 Emergency jacking console

Switch on the Central Control Console

Switch off the Central Control Console

5 Local mode checking ( ELT function)

On the Central Control Console, select Local mode

Push on “ELT HULL UP”
Check that hull is going up for this chord ( during around 3 seconds)
Push on “ELT LEG UP”
Check that leg is going up for this chord ( during around 3 seconds)

7 Load sensor setting and record values

8 Auxiliary equipment
(see specific pre-commissioning)

9 Alarms testing:

Emergency Stop
Push on “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom button
Check that the alarms appear and all leg moves are stopped
Release “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom button
Acknowledge

Rack chock status: engaged

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact closed and rack chock
disengaged contact open
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 29 / 39

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact open and rack chock disengaged
contact open
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

On the screen, push on the message rack chock status

Check that override message appears
Check that the leg move it is possible

Rack chock status: disengaged

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact open and rack chock disengaged
contact close
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is possible

Leg: High limit stop

Leg: Low limit stop

Warning Excessive inclination

Select the central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
Push on the inclinometer panel for simulate excessive inclination
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops

Stop Excessive inclination

Select the central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
Push on the inclinometer panel for simulate excessive inclination
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops

Desk: I/O modulus fault

Select central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
On the desk , unplug one I/O modulus from the rack
Check that the alarm appear and the leg stops
Plug the I/O modulus
Acknowledge

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 30 / 39

Brake: fault
Disconnect one brake switch
Push on “HULL UP” or “HULL DOWN”
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the brake switch

Brake: manually released

Install a strap on motor brake switch terminals
Check that the warning appears

Motor: overheating
Disconnect one thermistor
Check that alarm appears
Check the leg move is possible
Reconnect the thermistor
Acknowledge

Motor: circuit breaker tripped

Shutdown one motor circuit breaker
Check that the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Switch on the motor circuit breaker
Acknowledge

Motor: Lack of current

Disconnect one motor current converter
Push on “HULL UP” or “HULL DOWN”
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the motor current converter

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 31 / 39

AT. Contactor Fault

Disconnect the AT2 contactor coil

MCC: Emergency stop

Disconnect the RM relay coil
Check the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Reconnect the RM relay coil
Acknowledge

MCC: I/O Modulus Fault

Unplug one I/O modulus from the rack
Check the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Plug the I/O modulus from the rack

MCC: insulation fault

Push on the test button on the insulation controller
Check the warning appears

MCC: OFF
Unplug the Ethernet cable on Ethernet I/O modulus
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Plug the cable

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 32 / 39

Pinion: load > ABS storm value

Replace one load sensor by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate pinion load sensor is higher than 646T
Check the message appear

Load sensor: Fault

Replace one load sensor by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate 20mA
Check the message appears

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 33 / 39

5.3. STBD LEG

For this test 3 technicians are required: 1 at Jacking control panel, 1 at MCC, 1 near the concerned
jacking unit, all with communication means

Warning: Consider the mechanical consequence of each operation

Warning for all operations inside electrical equipment:

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
1 Brake release control checking

On the Central Control Console, select the local mode

Do these operations for all brakes

2 Retorquing mode checking

On the Central Control Console, select the retorquing mode

Repeat for each jacking unit

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 34 / 39

CHECKED
Point Description INITIAL DATE
3 Central mode checking

Make sure that Rack Chock are disengaged

4 Emergency jacking console

Switch on the Central Control Console

Switch off the Central Control Console

5 Local mode checking ( ELT function)

On the Central Control Console, select Local mode

Push on “ELT HULL UP”
Check that hull is going up for this chord ( during around 3 seconds)
Push on “ELT LEG UP”
Check that leg is going up for this chord ( during around 3 seconds)

7 Load sensor setting and record values

8 Auxiliary equipment
(see specific pre-commissioning)

9 Alarms testing:

Emergency Stop
Push on “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom button
Check that the alarms appear and all leg moves are stopped
Release “EMERGENCY STOP” mushroom button
Acknowledge

Rack chock status: engaged

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact closed and rack chock
disengaged contact open
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 35 / 39

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact open and rack chock disengaged
contact open
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is not possible

On the screen, push on the message rack chock status

Check that override message appears
Check that the leg move it is possible

Rack chock status: disengaged

Simulate “ rack chock engaged” contact open and rack chock disengaged
contact close
Check the message rack chock status
Check that the leg move it is possible

Leg: High limit stop

Leg: Low limit stop

Warning Excessive inclination

Select the central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
Push on the inclinometer panel for simulate excessive inclination
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops

Stop Excessive inclination

Select the central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
Push on the inclinometer panel for simulate excessive inclination
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops

Desk: I/O modulus fault

Select central mode
Push on “HULL UP”
On the desk , unplug one I/O modulus from the rack
Check that the alarm appear and the leg stops
Plug the I/O modulus
Acknowledge

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 36 / 39

Brake: fault
Disconnect one brake switch
Push on “HULL UP” or “HULL DOWN”
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the brake switch

Brake: manually released

Install a strap on motor brake switch terminals
Check that the warning appears

Motor: overheating
Disconnect one thermistor
Check that alarm appears
Check the leg move is possible
Reconnect the thermistor
Acknowledge

Motor: circuit breaker tripped

Shutdown one motor circuit breaker
Check that the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Switch on the motor circuit breaker
Acknowledge

Motor: Lack of current

Disconnect one motor current converter
Push on “HULL UP” or “HULL DOWN”
Check that the alarm appears and the leg stops
Acknowledge
Reconnect the motor current converter

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 37 / 39

AT. Contactor Fault

Disconnect the AT2 contactor coil

MCC: Emergency stop

Disconnect the RM relay coil
Check the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Reconnect the RM relay coil
Acknowledge

MCC: I/O Modulus Fault

Unplug one I/O modulus from the rack
Check the alarm appears
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Plug the I/O modulus from the rack

MCC: insulation fault

Push on the test button on the insulation controller
Check the warning appears

MCC: OFF
Unplug the Ethernet cable on Ethernet I/O modulus
Check that the leg move it is not possible
Plug the cable

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 38 / 39

Pinion: load > ABS storm value

Replace one load sensor by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate pinion load sensor is higher than 646T
Check the message appear

Load sensor: Fault

Replace one load sensor by the 4-20mA generator
Simulate 20mA
Check the message appears

VGA – 04/07/2014 – Rev. 02 10906931 Page 39 / 39

NOV-BLM
15, rue de la Métallurgie
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX
France
Phone : 33 2 40 68 36 00
Fax : 33 2 40 68 36 10 / 22
[Link] : blm@[Link]

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION N°103478

PRE COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE

FOR AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

Diffusion : File
DATE Visa Check Appr
Creation 13.04.06 NLE FMA FDE
Ind
A Application to D60H 29/06/07 TBO FMA
B Included detailed RPD procedure, warning, 23/01/08 XPI
details for PLMS records and inclinometer,
Miscellaneous
C Adaptation to JU2000 – DNS E2/3/5 26/01/08 XPI
C150E
D Comments on process 08/04/08 JMA
E Updated for the new building 07/11/11 VGA
F Accuracy of the measure (2 mm) added in 14/11/11 FMA
the description
G Change Chapter II.2 no standardize 22/12/11 FMA
description
01 Add “Typical leg markings” Folio 6/9 31/05/13 ABR FMA
02 Add tick boxes 21/07/14 VGA PCA
Update the PLMS adjustment procedure.
Add resistor bank checks.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 1 / 11

1. Summary

1. SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................................ 2

2. PINION LOAD MONITORING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 3

2.1. ZERO ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................................................... 3

2.2. RECORDING ............................................................................................................................................... 3

3. LEG HEIGHT DETECTION AND RACK PHASE DIFFERENCE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM .................................... 4

3.1. DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................. 4

3.2. CALIBRATING THE RPD MONITORING SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 5

4. INCLINOMETER ADJUSTMENT, INCLINATION VALUES ............................................................................... 9

4.1. INSTALLATION INCLINATION SENSOR ................................................................................................................ 9

4.2. INSTALLATION WATER LEVEL: ......................................................................................................................... 9

5. RESISTOR BANK....................................................................................................................................... 10

5.1. WATER COOLDED RESISTOR BANK ................................................................................................................. 10

6. MISCELLANEOUS ..................................................................................................................................... 11

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 2 / 11

2. PINION LOAD MONITORING SYSTEM

PLMS must be set in operation as soon as possible, prior applying torque to the pinions and at
least prior the first jacking operation.

2.1. Zero Adjustment

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Make sure that there is no load on the pinion.
Reset to zero or release manually the brake (see installation procedure in
part C and dwg PMOT 962) at the jacking unit installation stage (see pre
commissioning procedure, keep the washers and spacers for reinstallation
later).

2 Read part D for access to the setting pages

Reset the corresponding load sensor.

3 If alarm “sensor defect” or “zero out of range” appears or display show

more than +/- 2mA, check and / or adjust the sensor and circuit (see
PLMS installation).

2.2. Recording

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Retorque step by step from 0 to 100% and record the readings. Do the
same from the maximum retorquing values to the minimum.

Note: It is possible to adjust the “zeros” for all motors by pushing “reset all” (in case of all pinions are
free of load; while the rig is hold by rack chock for example).
It is possible to restore zero original value by pushing “restore original value” (If there is no load on the
pinion, the true zero value of the sensor will be taken in account).

The load sensors themselves are adjusted in the factory; however, they are very sensitive and may
have to be adjusted again after installation.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 3 / 11

3. LEG HEIGHT DETECTION and Rack Phase Difference measurement
system

3.1. Description
It consists in:
- One height detection per chord, including idle pinions and pulse counters,
- 1 set of electrical signal process components in each MCC,
- Screens display on central Jacking console,
- Software for PLC located in each MCC,
- Power Supply 24V DC.

The purpose of the RPD is to display the relative differences of displacement of the 3 chords of a leg.
This height difference between chords may be created by contact of the spud can on the sea bed. The
measurement of the displacement of each chord is performed by a Leg height detector fitted at each
chord. The detector consists of an idle pinion that meshes with the rack and rotates only during the
vertical displacement of the chord. This pinion drives two pulse counters that deliver signals to the
MCC which processes these signals and display the RPD values on the central Jacking console. The
accuracy of the measured value is 2 mm. The length of the leg deployed below the hull is displayed on
the same screen as the Pinion Load Monitoring System screen, located on the jacking central console.

The detector is designed to be fitted on top of the Jacking frames (IP 56). Installation is made by
welding the detector base on the steel floor. No under deck reinforcement is required.
The RPD is not a positive safety. It does not stop the Jacking operation and does not deliver any
audible warning. The values of chord relative displacement are displayed for the Jacking operator who
decides when and how a correction is necessary. The maximum allowable RPD is to be determined
by the rig designer. If this value is overpassed, it can cause major damage to the leg.

Considering the above purpose of the system, it must be set in operation before the first jacking.

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 The height detection must be preliminary positioned and welded as
described in part C.

2 Check that the proper height detection give signal to the corresponding
leg/chord on the screen and that the signal operate in the good direction
(2 detectors can be mixed).

3 Enter an alarm value for RPD (Rack Phase Difference) as given by the rig
designer.
Check this alarm entering an excessive value for one chord on the setting
screen. When the programmed threshold is reached or overflowed, the
RPD value change of color

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 4 / 11

3.2. Calibrating the RPD Monitoring System

Prior to jacking operations, the RPD Monitor System must be shown to be calibrated properly verses
the physical measurements taken atop the jackhouses. The following procedure is to be followed:

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check each Chord Height Detection atop the jackhouses to insure they
are fully engaged in the chord racks. There are one per chord as shown
below.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 5 / 11

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
2 Very importantly. The chord with the leg numbering is considered to be
the master chord for each leg. Failure to consider this will result in miss-
calibration of the Leg Below Hull Indicators on the Jacking Console
described further on. This is the first chord to be measured on each leg.
Determine the leg height at the top of the gear unit. Note that you must,
generally, read the distance from the bottom of the numbers or the
bottom of the hash bars. Determine the chord number i.e. 27.30 which
equals 27,230-mm which is the distance from the bottom of the spud can
to that position atop the jackhouse. Write this number down for each leg.
See the drawing below which explains however to determine the leg
numbering arrangement.

TYPICAL LEG MARKING

95000 mm to the top of the spud can

bottom plate.
34 mm further to spud can bottom.
Tip of can actually 95034 from this
reference point.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 6 / 11

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
3 All RPD measurements should be taken on the rack on the side of the
RPD Measuring Unit. Note that all measurements must also be consistent
e.g. left side of each rack looking from the center of the leg toward each
chord.

4 A Reference Plate must be installed and its height must be consistent,

chord-to-chord for accuracy of RPD readings as shown below. The
Measuring Tool determines where the chords are located in vertical
relationship to each other. It is designed to mesh with the rack teeth and
offers the ability to measure the distance from the bottom of the
Measuring Tool to the top of the Measuring Plate

For example, on the Bow Leg Chord “A” reads 120-mm, Chord “B” reads 150-mm, and Chord “C”
reads 70-mm; then the actual RPD is measured is as follows: “B” = 150 (-) 70 (=) 80-mm, “A” = 120 (-)
70 (=) 50-mm. Chord “A” is considered to Have Zero RPD since it is the chord with the leg numbering.

Note that it is very important that the Measuring Tool is placed at the same rack tooth level on
all chords i.e. the 5th tooth below the horizontal leg member for example. See the picture which
follows.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 7 / 11

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
5 Once all RPD and chord number measurements are taken, then the
chord-below-hull measurement must be determined as follows using a
Bow Leg reading example:

BOW LEG CALCULATION EXAMPLE

A B C
Description Chord "A" Chord "B" Chord "C" Comments
Master Chord Number (in "A" Chord Number Measured –
27,230
1 MM) Jackhouse
2 Measuring Tool Number 120 150 70 "C" - Lowest Chord Below Jackhouse
3 Actual RPD Measured 50 80 "B" - Highest Chord Above Jackhouse
4 Differential to Master Chord 0 -30 +50 [A2(-)A2] [A2(-)B2] [A2(-)C2]
Actual Chord Height Above
27,230 27,200 27,280 [A1(+)A4] [A1(+)B4] [A1(+)C4]
5 Jackhouse
6 Less Hull and Jackhouse (-17,463) (-17,463) (-17,463) Top of Jackhouse to Bottom of the Hull
8 Actual Leg Below the Hull 9,767 9,737 9,817 Number to enter into PLC Control

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
6 Display the height setting on the screen (refer to part D “OPERATION”).
Push on the screen for each measurement and enter the chord height
below the hull for each chord. When complete, push on the screen
“Transfer New Values to PLC” to set the RPD data reference points.

Note that the screen now shows the actual chord below the hull for each leg chord. Proceed to the
other Legs and enter the new numbers. Verify the numbers determined in Step 5 are accurate.

WARNING!!!!

ENSURE THAT PROPER DATA IS ENTERED ON EACH SCREEN. ENTRY OF THE WRONG
DATA COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO OCCUR TO THE LEG MEMBERS FROM IMPROPER RPD
REFERENCES DURING JACKING.

TWO CREW MEMBERS MUST ATTEND AND VERIFIY THE DATA ENTRY IS CORRECT AND
LOG AS SUCH IN THE RIG MOVE LOG.

NOTE ALSO THAT THE RPD MONITOR SYSTEM IN NO WAY REPLACES MANUAL CHECKS AS
THE RIG MOVE JACKING PROGRESS.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 8 / 11

4. INCLINOMETER ADJUSTMENT, Inclination values

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check by moving the supporting plate of the electronic inclination indicator
and looking at the point on the screen that it is working in the good
directions

2 Prior or during the first jacking, set the platform horizontal.

Condition: The rig has to be at 0° level (confirmed by yard).

4.1. Installation inclination sensor

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 See the central control desk electrical drawing for positioning the
inclination sensor panel. Tighten middle screw to block the sensor.

4.2. Installation water level:

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Generally, a water level constituted by a tank located in the middle of the
rig and 3 pipes going to each leg is temporarily installed. References are
set near each legs and the level is adjusted by using the jacking system
and checking the 3 water levels. Once the horizontality is reached set the
2 bubbles levels indicators and the electronic one to zero.
The axle x and y of the electronic one must also be adjusted by turning it
in the horizontal plan.
Adjust the alarm and stop thresholds to the values desired by the
customer generally 1,2° and 2,5°.

2 On each leg, at the same height and same position, install a water level
with graduations, reference will be taken on the main deck. The three legs
must be connected at the same point.
From the jacking system, adjust each leg to obtain same level of water on
each leg.
When water levels are same on all legs, adjust nuts from inclination
sensor to put red slot in the middle of the screen (0° on each axle). This
operation should be accomplished with the utmost accuracy in order to
avoid any error in slope measurement.

3 Adjust 2 bubbles levels on the jacking console.

Set some alarms levels (0.2 - 0.5°) on the screens and check operating
legs.
At the first alarm, buzzer sounds.
At the second alarm, jacking stops.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 9 / 11

5. RESISTOR BANK

When the rig generator power balance is not always positive when the jacking system is using, one
resistor bank per leg is installed. When the MCC power is negative, the resistor is supplied.

5.1. Water coolded resistor bank

Duplicate this table for each resistor bank

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check that supply voltage is comply with design voltage

2 Check that the electrical wiring is made

3 Check that access to the junction boxes and sensors are correct
Check that dismounting distance is correct (see resistor bank general
arrangement)

4 Check that inlet and outlet water pressure indicator are readable
Check that inlet and outlet temperature indicator are readable

5 Check that valve draining pipe is clean

This valve permit to evacuate the water if the pressure inside resistor is
high

6 Check cleanliness and good state of the end isolator (ceramic beads)

7 Check the insulation between active parts and earth

(higher than 1Mohm at 500VDC)

8 Check that conformity of water cooled circuit : fluid nature inlet

temperature, outlet temperature working pressure, (see resistor bank
general arrangement for the values in part C)

9 Water cooled circuit have water and without flow

Check that resistor bank have not water leakage
Check that inlet pressure is less than the pressure switch threshold
Adjust the inlet pressure switch if required
Threshold is : _____bar
Nota : If the pressure without flow is higher than working pressure,
the resistor bank can be not working

10 Water cooled circuit is running with nominal flow

Check that resistor bank have not water leakage
Check the inlet pressure ( ___Bar)
Check the outlet pressure (___Bar)
Check that this pressures are less than working pressure
Check the inlet temperature(___°C)
Check the outlet temperature (___°C)
Check that these temperature are less than maximum inlet temperature
(see resistor bank general arrangement for the values in part C)
Check on the central control console, the temperature value displayed are
approximatively same

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 10 / 11

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
11 One technician go to the central control console for switch on or off the
resistor bank
One technician go to resistor bank for check pressure and temperature
Make sure that the water cooled circuit is operational and running
Make sure that the inlet pressure switch is correctly adjusted
Make sure that the rig generator can be supply the resistor bank
On the central control console, display the leg page for display the resistor
bank control
Switch on the resistor bank with push button on the screen
Check the inlet and outlet pressure
Check the inlet and outlet temperature
If the these values are higher than the maximum value, switch off the
resistor bank
After the stabilization at the maximum operating temperature, measure the
values below
inlet pressure :____Bar
Outlet pressure :____Bar
Inlet temperature: ____°C
Outlet temperature: ____°C
Switch off the thermostats and adjust its set point at 10 or 20°C above
its cut out point.
Outlet thermostat threshold:_____°C
Inside thermostat threshold :_____°C

6. Miscellaneous
As soon as possible, prior the first jacking except for the upper limit switches which must be adjust
at the end of the full ride:

CHECKED
Point INITIAL DATE
1 Check the good running of the voltmeters, frequency meters and power
meters.

2 Set in operation the greasing units (if any).

3 Adjust the lower limit switches and upper ones.

4 Record the programs numbers, indices, date of installation and fill the
corresponding factory form including the name of the operator.

VGA – 24/07/2014 – Rev. 02 103478 Page 11 / 11

C05
14/10/13
C05 ABR
Rev. 01
FULL RIDE WARNING Fol 1/1

WARNING :

FULL RIDE test (jacking up and down on the full length of the legs) is an
exceptional operation which may cause overheating to the jacking gear motors.
In case the shipyard commissioning procedure includes a FULL RIDE test, it is
recommended taking some precautions to avoid damages:

The motors running time will most probably exceed the motor rating specified in the
motor performance data sheet. Depending on the weather conditions, the effective
running time of the motor before the temperature safety gauge reaches its threshold
value may be over passed.

Above the motor rating operating time, we can also observe some brake temperature
increase. It is recommended to check brake cover temperature: If the brake
temperature reaches 85°C, it is necessary to stop the jacking operation.

If motor temperature or brake temperature rise above their acceptable values, the
instruction are as follows:
• Stop jacking operation.
• Perform individual retorque of the overheating jacking gear motor by retorquing to 0
then retorquing to average pinion load value.
• Wait for temperature decreasing before restart jacking. (typically 2 hours )

C05-C150EF
PART D
Document
ADVISE FOR USE

• Operation D-C150EF

Rig movements control D1

Retorquing control mode D2

Brake control from local console D3

ELT control from local console D4

Emergency jacking from local console D5

Operator dialog screens D6

Safety notice D7

« DISABLE THE SAFETIES » D8

Emergency jacking procedure D9

ABR–15/04/2014 – Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-D

24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 1 / 25

NOTES:

This chapter describes only the use of:

- the central control console,
- ELT control local box and
- emergency jacking local box.

Rig installation, jacking operations and preload operations are not part of this
document.

Before using the jacking system, check:

• The gear units are properly mounted and fixed on the frame and screws
properly-tightened.
• The lubrication instructions are respected: oil level in the gear cases, greasing
of rack and pinions (refer to part E for details).
• The electric cabinets are locked.
• The security devices: guards fixed and in good conditions, sensors and others
electrical security devices connected and accurately adjusted.
• That nobody is close to moving or heating parts (pinions, racks, motors, etc…).
• There is no defect light appearing on the console.

Regarding the PLMS (Pinion Load Monitoring System) informations displayed

on the console, we remind that the pinion load displayed is not the rig weight
value. The pinion load is different from the rig weight (pinion rack meshing and leg
guides induces efficiencies).
- During jacking up: pinion load > rig weight
- During jacking down: pinion load < rig weight

D-C150EF
CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 3 of 25

D.1 Rig movements control

The rig is controlled by an individual control of the legs from the central control
console.

• Selector « CONSOLE POWER»

This selector allows to supply central control console with or without activation of the
buttons.
OFF: control console switch off.
DISPLAY ONLY: only display mode.
ON: control desk ready to use.

• Push buttons « CONTROL MODE »

These 3 buttons are for choosing the functioning mode of the console:
LOCAL: for local manual operating of the motor brakes and for ELT control console.
CENTRAL: for operating the jacking up/down from the central console.
RETORQUING: for operating the retorquing device (equalizing the pinion torque).

• Push buttons « HULL UP – LEG DOWN »

The action on this button allows/enables the jacking rig to move upwards by the
activation of the ”UP” motor contactors of the 18 jacking units of one leg.
The switchgear and motors heating of the corresponding leg is switching off. The 18
brakes become energized the first second with a voltage of 115v afterwards they
hold a certain voltage (28v).

• Push button « HULL DOWN – LEG UP »

The action on this button enables the jacking rig to move downwards by means of the
“DOWN” motor contactors.

• Push button « STOP »

The action on this button stops the leg movement.

• Push button « EMERGENCY STOP »

The action on this button stops the 3 legs movement.

• Push button « TEST LAMPS »

The action on this button switches on all the lights of the central console and allows
to check all bulbs are effective.

• Push button “ACKNOWLEDGE”

The action on this button allows the restarting of rig movements after checking and
solving the problem.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 4 of 25

• « SOUND SIGNAL »
The sound signal is audible when a defect appears.

• Push button « BUZZER STOP »

The action on this button stops the sound signal when a defect makes it start.

• Selector switch « INCLINATION OVERRIDE »

This selector allows switching off inclination safeties, especially during towing and
moving operations of the rig.

• Selector switch «OVERRIDE SAFETIES»

This selector allows switching off rig safeties except inclination and emergency stop.
VERY IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation mode must remain an exceptional mode and requires
preliminary checking of the source of the defect that caused the jacking
movement to stop due to one or several safety alarms. While in action, this
switch makes the locking devices invalid. Very important mechanical damages
may occur.
If the use of this switch is necessary, the operator shall carefully supervise the
visual alarms of the overload motor and brake, and stops them as soon as
possible when a brake or overload defect appears on display.

• Selector switch «PLC BACKUP»

This switch is to select the MAIN PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) mode or the
BACKUP PLC mode.
The jacking system is controlled by a PLC located in the central control console.
Another PLC housed in a separate control chest allows the same functions in case of
failure of the console PLC.

During normal jacking operations, the selector switch must be on « MAIN PLC». In
case of main PLC dysfunction or in case of emergency operation, the operator will
select «PLC BACKUP».
This PLC backup also allows jacking from emergency local control box if the central
console is faulty or inoperative.

The transition from one PLC to another requires a reset time of the network during
which no order can be made.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 5 of 25

D.2 Retorquing control mode

This feature allows load balancing between the different mechanisms before making
an order for jacking.

- Select the « RETORQUING » mode with push button.

- Select a motor by action on the corresponding button on screen, when this

motor is selected this button becomes green.

- Select a torque to apply by action on the corresponding button on screen,

when this torque is selected this button becomes green.

- When the motor and the torque are selected, the button “RETORQUE
AVAILABLE” appears.

- The action on this button applies the selected torque on the chosen motor.
Press the button until the pilot light « RETORQUE PERFORMED » is on.

An excessive utilization of one torque activates a safety that disables this torque
feature.
Choose other torque or wait the self reset of the corresponding thermal relay (~3mn).

D.3 Brake control from local console

The portable brake control box is to be plug on the ELT local control console on each
chord.

Note: We remind that the brakes are failsafe brakes, applied when they are dis-
energized, by spring force, and released (disabled) when their solenoid coils
are energized. A “brake release” consists in feeding its solenoid coil.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 6 of 25

The individual brake control is accessible from the local console located on each
chord.
- On the central console, select «LOCAL» mode.
- On the local box, set the switch “POWER” to “ON” and select the brake to
release and push the “RELEASE” button. The brake remains released as long
as you keep pushing the button.

A portable control box is also available to control the brake.

The individual brake command is also possible from the central console. Select the
«RETORQUING » mode. Select a motor and select the torque «0 %». Press the
button “BRAKE RELEASE”.

The brake is fed only during retorquing (~3sec).

The sequence is ended when the pilot light « RETORQUE PERFORMED » flashes.

D.4 ELT control from local console

ELT local control console provided on each chord.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 7 of 25

The ELT command allows applying power to all the motors of one chord at a reduced
voltage during 3 seconds during operations of locking or unlocking of the fixation
system.

The motors supply is at a voltage of 520 V with the button “ELT HULL UP” and a
voltage of 275 V with the button “ELT LEG UP”.

D.5 Emergency jacking from local console

Emergency local control console provided on each leg.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 8 of 25

This control is possible, either with the main plc or the backup plc.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 9 of 25

Operating with the emergency local control when central control console is “ON”

If the central control console is on “power on” status, the emergency local control
console, when switched on “power on”, takes over the central console, on the leg
only. The central console screens display the leg status (“leg up” or “leg down” green
lights) and the alarms, but the control on the leg is not possible, except the
“emergency stop” action.
The control from the central console on the two other legs is still possible.

Operating with the 3 emergency local controls when central control console is “OFF”
or faulty

The emergency stop of central control console is always operational.

On the 3 emergency local consoles switch on “power on” for use the jacking system.
When the alarm occurs, all legs stop. This alarm is signalled by “failure” light and the
buzzer on concerning leg emergency local control.

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE

This mode of operation should remain exceptional because the electronic
inclinometer is then inoperative and the operator exposed the jack-up to major
risk of damage.

The operator must analyze what actions are to be taken to restore the jack-up
in an acceptable position to avoid jamming or collapsing the legs.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 10 of 25

D.6 Operator dialog screens

 Home screen

3 2 4 1 9 8 7 6 5

The home screen lets you view the following information.

1. Inclination and current alarm thresholds (yellow) and stop (red).
2. Rack chock status (engaged-disengaged-intermediate).
3. Leg height.
4. Status of each apparatus dedicated to the leg.
5. The power absorbed or released by the leg.
6. The load of all pinions of the leg.
7. The RPD value of each chord.
8. The status of the leg with access to the page by pressing the triangle.
9. The motors currents.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 11 of 25

 Inclination display on home page

This set detects the inclination of the rig according two measuring axles. The
direction and the inclination degree are permanently displayed (the red dot show the
highest point).
Two alarm thresholds are adjustable. The measuring range is set between 0.1° and
5° on each axle.
The 1st threshold gives an audible alarm and the 2nd stop jacking operations (Hull
up/Hull down).

Enter the suitable thresholds value and validate them by pushing on screen button
«VALID».

It is possible to override the second threshold by turning the key selector switch
“OVERRIDE INCLINATION”.
The indication light «EXCESSIVE INCLINATION» flashes and the message «
OVERRIDE ON» appears on the display.

IMPORTANT NOTE
This operation mode must remain an exceptional mode. The operator takes the
risks of exposing the jack up to severe damages.
This key selector switch requires the permanent survey of the inclination and
of the visual alarms for “overloading” and “brake default”. It is the operator’s
responsibility to analyse and to take the correct actions to put the platform in
an acceptable inclination level to avoid leg blocking in their guides.

In case of failure of the electronic inclinometer, two bubble inclinometers (one with
graduation from 0° to 2° and one with graduation from 0° to 5°), fixed on the panel,
provide the rig inclination.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 12 of 25

 Motors current and load pinion display screen

This page allows you to check the current of all motors and the load applied on all
pinions.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 13 of 25

 Leg details screen in central mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1. Display the height of the leg.

2. Display the absorbed or released power of the leg.
3. Voltage and frequency of cabinet.
4. Display motor current.
5. Display pinion load.
6. Motor status (ready / running / overheating / lack of current / brake released /
circuit breaker / brake fault / overload / override).
7. Display load of each chord.
8. Display the RPD value of the chord (red is threshold is exceeded).
9. Display the leg status.).

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 14 of 25

 Leg details screen in retorquing mode

2 3
1

1. Selection button of the motor.

2. Selection button on the torque to be applied.
3. Retorquing button.

 Motors current screen

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 15 of 25

1 2 3

1. Time scale adjustment button.

2. Current scale adjustment button.
3. Button to see a larger curve.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 16 of 25

 Pinions load screen

1 2 3

1. Time scale adjustment button.

2. Load scale adjustment button.
3. Button to see a larger curve.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 17 of 25

 Alarms screen

Drop down menu to select alarms to be displayed.

Alarms are recorded in their occurrence order. The active alarms are displayed in
yellow and the acknowledged alarms are displayed in green. The arrows on the
screen allow moving in the list. It is not possible to delete or to modify the alarm list.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 18 of 25

 Setting screen

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1. Validation and transfer button of thresholds in the PLC.

2. Threshold alarm setting of inclination.
3. Threshold adjustment maximum tilt before stopping.
4. Validation button and transfer date and time in the PLC.
5. Display the current program and the connected PLC.
6. Access load sensor adjustment and height of the leg.
7. Access code button (3645) in these settings.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 19 of 25

 Setting screen of load sensor and height measurement

6 5 4 1 3 2

1. Chord height adjustment in mm.

2. Validation button and transfer of height values and RPD in the PLC.
3. Threshold setting of the RPD in mm.
4. Sensor status (overflow value-zero out of range)
5. Load sensor reset button.
6. Display of signal sensor and the corresponding load to the pinion.

Pinion load sensor zero adjustment :

During a jacking operation, if one or several sensors indicate values very different
from the others, it is necessary to check the offset value of the sensor.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 20 of 25

In all cases, an electronic reset can only be done after a brake supply (check that
there is no load on the pinion). If necessary, release the brake with the local
control console.

Once the load on pinion is zero:

Select the unit by pressing on the screen button
If the output signal coming from the sensor is equal to +/-2mA, then the value shown
on the display comes to 0T.

If the output signal coming from the sensor is out of the range +/-2mA, then the
message «ZERO OUT OF RANGE» is displayed on the screen. The zero adjustment
of the sensor requires a mechanical recalibration of the sensor on the unit, by
following the calibration procedure detailed in the installation procedure of the PLMS
(Pinion Load Monitoring System) (mechanical adjustment in the range +/-0,2mA or
+/-0,5mA).
After recalibration, press the button of the selected unit. The message «ZERO OUT
OF RANGE» disappears and the value shown on the display comes to 0 T.

If the sensor presents a default (wires cut or measured value out of the normal range
+/- 20mA), a message appears on the screen «SENSOR SIGNAL OVER VALUE».
This default can be solving by a mechanical recalibration or by replacement of the
sensor.

• «RESET»
Caution, this can only happen without load on any of the pinions of the chord.
This button allows adjustment of all the sensors of one chord to 0.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 21 of 25

 Network

When the communication is not established or internal failure is detected , the

equipments flash.
When you push on equipment picture, the I/O modulus status displays

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 22 of 25

D.7 Safety notice

Safeties Actions

Emergency stop Visual alarm Audible alarm

Emergency stop Rig X X

End stroke limit switch
Leg X X
(upper or lower)
Rack Chock are not
Leg X X
disengaged
Warning Excessive inclination - X X

Stop Excessive inclination Rig X X

Brake circuit breaker tripped Rig X X

Brake: fault Rig X X

Brake: manually released - X

Motor: overload Rig X X

Motor: lack of current Rig X X

Motor: circuit breaker tripped Rig X X

Motor: overheating - X X
RETORQUING
Overheating retorquing relay X X
MODE
RETORQUING
Autotransformer: Overheating X X
MODE
RETORQUING
Thermal relays: fault X X
MODE
AT. Contactor fault Rig X X

I/O modulus fault Rig X X

Redundancy network fault - X X

Pinion: load >abs storm - X X

Load sensor : fault - X X

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 23 of 25

Should an alarm and motion stop occur, it is necessary to understand the cause of
the problem and correct them before continuing the jacking operations.

Especially, the alarms «Motor: Overload» and «Motor: overheating» indicate the
jacking operation with an overload on the pinions and excessive duration or
excessive Start/Stop of the system.

In such a situation, it is necessary to correct the causes of the overload and wait for
the motors to cool down of before continuing the jacking operations.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 24 of 25

D.8 «DISABLE THE SAFETIES»

• LACK OF CURRENT

It is possible to override the default «LACK OF CURRENT»:

- push on the «ACKNOWLEDGE» button,
- Turn the key «OVERRIDE SAFETIES» and press the button «JACK UP» or «JACK
DOWN» while the key is turn.

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE

Be careful, it is possible to override a maximum of two safeties per chord.
This operation mode must remain an exceptional mode and requires
preliminary checking of the source of the defect that caused the jacking
movement to stop. During the action of this switch, the safety locking devices
are invalid. Very important mechanical damages may occur.
If the use of this switch is necessary, the operator shall carefully supervise the
overload motor and brake visual alarm, and stop it as soon as possible when a
brake or overload defect appears on the display.

• BRAKE FAULT

It is possible to override the default «BRAKE FAULT»:

DO NOT push on «ACKNOWLEDGE» button, turn the key «OVERRIDE SAFETIES»
and press the button «BRAKE FAULT» of the motor concerned. The message
«BRAKE FAULT» changes to «OVERRIDE». Press the button «HULL UP» or «HULL
DOWN» while the key is turned.

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE

Before «BRAKE FAULT» override, we recommend to isolate the motor as
explained in the following procedure.
Be careful, it is possible to override a maximum of two safeties per chord.
This operation mode must remain an exceptional mode and requires
preliminary checking of the source of the defect that caused the jacking
movement to stop. During the action of this switch, the safety locking devices
are invalid. Very important mechanical damages may occur.
If the use of this switch is necessary, the operator shall carefully supervise the
overload motor and brake visual alarm, and stop it as soon as possible when a
brake or overload defect appears on display.

D-C150EF
24/04/2014
D VGA
Rev02
OPERATION 25 of 25

D.9 Emergency jacking procedure

WARNING: should damage occur in a gear unit, it is not recommended to use the
jacking system.
This procedure is for emergency jacking only, under the responsibility of a qualified
operator.
HYDRALIFT – BLM will not recognise any responsibility for any damage, direct or
indirect, resulting from the use of this procedure.
In all other situations, it is recommendable to repair the damages before jacking.

THIS PROCEDURE MUST NOT BE APPLIED

IF MORE THAN ONE MOTOR IS DEFECTIVE

Refer to electric wiring details drawing 10724622.

1- Mechanical release of brake (drawing PMOT962):

- Remove 2 opposite screws (Rep. 1), spacers (Rep. 2) and washers (Rep. 3)
from brake cover.
- Loosen the 2 screws only (no spacers or washers) to free the brake disc, and
consequently load on pinion.

2- Open the concerned circuit breaker.

3- Bridge circuit breaker contact (10724622 folio 14).

4- Inject a signal of about 10mA in the PLC input modulus (10724622 folio 30) to
simulate a motor current.

5- Operate the jacking system with a particular survey to the concerned motor/brake.

WARNING: The platform rises too slowly or it descends too fast in the area
concentrated around the leg that has a defective mechanism. It is necessary to
periodically verify or correct the horizontality of the platform.

D-C150EF
PART E
Document
MAINTENANCE - REPAIR
• Disclaimer

• Lubrication E01
E01-C150EF
Lubrication code 10895164
Table of corresponding of lubrifiants G006

• Electrical maintenance E02

E02-C150EF

• Mechanism maintenance E03

E03-C150EF

• Gears Behaviour E04

E04-C150EF

• Motor maintenance E05

E05-C150EF
Motor part 41003118
PMOT930

Magnetic brake F20 10929099

PMOT940
PMOT308
PMOT950
PMOT962

• Maintenance schedule E06

E06-C150EF

E07
• Changing of mechanism
………………
E08
• Service stations
E09
• Trouble shooting E09-C150EF

• Storage E10

Storage procedure 103299

• Automation E11
E11-C150EF
• Resistor bank
E12
E12-C150EF

ABR – 02/09/2014 – Rev. 03 GG-C150EF-E

15/03/11
MGA
DISCLAIMER Ind.A
Fol 1/1

The authors have taken due care in preparing these documents and the
examples herein. In no event NOV-BLM assume any liability to any person or
company for direct damage resulting from the use of the information contained
herein or discrepancies between this information and the actual operation of
the equipment.

Disclaimer
E01
18/08/14
E01 ABR
Rev. 02
LUBRICATION 1/3

• LUBRICATION OF RACK AND OUTLET PINION

Each rack must be continuously greased by brush grease.

Quality of grease : KOPR’KOT copper metal added grease or equal which has prove
to work satisfactory on rack and pinion application for jack up rig.
(Mark H8 in document « Table of lubricants » G006)

• LUBRICATION OF GEARBOX (see drawing 10895164)

WARNING:
An abnormal deterioration of mechanical parts (see part E04 “Gears
behaviour”) will be not covered by the guarantee in case of bad lubrication
consecutive to:

- Oil leaks caused by a shock or an abnormal use of the mechanism.

Read carefully all the chapter E to avoid any problem.

Primary gearbox:

♦ Filling Mark K

♦ Level Mark L

♦ Drain Mark M

Quantity: 140 litres

ISO viscosity grade: 220

Viscosity, ASTM D 445: 216 at + 40°C
25 at + 100°C

Viscosity Index, ASTM D 2270: 152

(Mark H3 in document « Table of lubricants » G006)

E01-C150EF
18/08/14
E01 ABR
Rev. 02
LUBRICATION 2/3

Secondary gearbox:

♦ Filling Mark F

♦ Level Mark G

♦ Drain Mark H

Quantity: ----- litres

ISO viscosity grade: 680

Viscosity, ASTM D 445: 664 at + 40°C
63 at + 100°C

Viscosity Index, ASTM D 2270: 165

(Mark H5 in document « Table of lubricants » G006)

The oil shall be suitable for supreme performance gear and bearing oils. If the oil is
the same for operating temperature range -20°C to 50°C, it shall be synthetic oil.

Check the oil level of reduction gear. The reduction gear being at rest over a period
of several hours, oil must flow from hole (mark L or G).
(When checking the oil level for secondary gearbox, one of the two plug F need to be
removed).

A lesser oil level implies filling through opening (mark K or F).

Refer to filling procedure at Chapter C01 Installation Procedure – Step 6.

There is a possibility of condensation having formed inside the gear case which is
vented to the atmosphere by the sniffing valve, loosen the drain plug in order to
ascertain any presence of water.
Although the original oil is provided for the whole duration of reduction gear, it is
recommended to make sure that the oil has preserved its lubrication qualities by
analysing a specimen at least once a year.

Verify if there is no presence of oil leaks by the different gaskets.

It is recommended to pulverize some oil like “ELF PROTERA FN 22 E ©” on each

mechanism, by using inspection doors (motors switched off), after an
immobilization about 3 - 6 month.
This will allow a first lubrication to the mechanism during jacking operation while
original oil is still in the bottom of the jacking frame.

E01-C150EF
18/08/14
E01 ABR
Rev. 02
LUBRICATION 3/3

• LUBRICATION OF THE LEG HEIGHT SENSOR GEARBOX

The leg height measurement device contains a gearbox reducer which works as a
multiplicator (drawing 3101119). This gearbox must be filled with hydraulic drive oil
very fluid (mark H1 in document G006 list of lubricant recommended) to work
properly.

Filling plug and breather

Quantity
required:
Oil level plug
0,9 litres

Bleeding plug

E01-C150EF
TABLEAU DES LUBRIFIANTS - Températures d'utilisation : -20° à +45°c sauf code H1
TABLE OF LUBRICANTS - Temperature range : -20° to +45°C except code H1

Code H1 H2 H3 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10
Utilisation Commandes Lubrification à l'huile Carter Couple roue et vis Engrenages nus Graisseur Pignon crémaillère Câbles d'acier Compatible avec
Marques Hydrauliques Articulations Engrenages droits sans fin compression et mécanismes centrale graissage
32-46 68-100 150-220-320 460-680 organes nus roulants élévation
Application Hydraulic drives Lubrication with oil Gear case Worm gear and Open gear Grease lubricator Rack pinion Steel cables Applicable by
Brands 32-46 for links Spur gears wheel Steel gear Open parts Elevating greasing Group
68-100 150-220-320 460-680 antifriction mechanisms
ARAL Vitam HF 32 Vitam GF Degol BG Degol BG Aralub LFZ 1 Aralub HLP 2 Aralub LFZ 1 Aralub LFZ 1
Vitam HF 46 68-100 Degol BMB Degol BMB Sinit FZL 3 Sinit FZL 3 Sinit FZL 3
Vitam DE 68 150-220-320 460-680
KLUBER mineral LAMORA Klüberoil Klüberoil Klüberoil Klüberplex Klübersynth Klüberplex Klüberplex
HLP 32/46 GEM 1-68 N/100 N GEM 1-150 N/220 GEM 1-460 N/680 AG 11-462 EM 94-102 AG 11-462 AG 11-462
N/320 N N Klüberplex
EM 91-102
KLUBER synthetic Klüberfood 4 Klübersynth Klübersynth Klübersynth Klübersynth
NH1-32/46 GEM 4-68 N/100 N GEM 4-150 N/220 GEM 4-460 N/680 BEM 34-132
N/320 N N
KLUBER Klüberbio Klüberbio Klübersynth Klüberbio Klüberbio Klüberbio Klüberbio Klüberbio Klüberbio
biodegradable LR 9-32 CA 2-100 GEM 2-220 CA 2-460 AG 39-602 AG 39-602 LG 39-700 AG 39-602 LG 39-700
LR 9-46 GEM 2-320
LR 9-68 Klüberbio Klüberbio
LG 39-701 LG 39-701

Klüberbio Klüberbio
AG 39-602 AG 39-602
ELF LUB. Visga 32 Turbine T 68 Epona Z Epona Z 680 Cardrexa Epexa MO 2 Cardrexa Cardrexa
MARINE (Antar) Visga 46 Misola H 68 150 – 220 - 320 DC 1 Multiservice DC 1 DC 1
Dexron Turbine T 100
B.P. Bartran HV THB 68 ou 77 GR-XP GR-XP 460 Energrease Energrease MM-EP 2 Energol WRP Energol WRP
32 ou 46 Bartran HV 150 – 220 - 320 GR-XP 680 OG Energrease GG Energrease GG
68 ou 100 Energrease OG
CASTROL Hyspin AWH 32 Hyspin AWH Alpha SP 150 Alpha SP 460 Spheerol SX 2 SpheerolEPL2 Spheerol SX 2 Spheerol SX 2 Bio Tac OG
Hyspin AWH 46 68 Alpha SP 220 Alpha SP 680
Hyspin AWH 100
COFRAN Equifluid TT Equinep Equipold Mecanep 460 Texblak F Equigrease Texblak F Texblak F
Super Sintopold HT 680 Super
Sintofluid Sintonep Sintogrease
TOTAL Visga 32 Turbine T 68 Elf Epona Z 150 Elf Epona Z 460 Ceran AD Plus Ceran WR2 Ceran AD Plus Ceran AD Plus
LUBMARINE Visga 46 Turbine T 100 Elf Epona Z 220 Carter EP 460 Multis MS 2
Equivis ZS 32 Preslia 68 Elf Epona Z320 Carter EP 480
Equivis ZS 46 Preslia 100 Carter EP 150
Carter EP 220
Carter EP 320
ESSO Univis N 32-46 Terrestic 68 Spartan Spartan Casar K 1 Beacon EP 2 Cazar K 1 Cazar K 1
Nuto H 32 EP 150 EP 680 Cazar K 2 Cazar K2 Cazar K2
A.T.F. Dexron EP 220

Rev 03 - G006
Code H1 H2 H3 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10
Utilisation Commandes Lubrification à l'huile Carter Couple roue et vis Engrenages nus Graisseur Pignon crémaillère Câbles d'acier Compatible avec
Marques Hydrauliques Articulations Engrenages droits sans fin compression et mécanismes élévation centrale graissage
32-46 68-100 150-220-320 460-680 organes nus roulants
Application Hydraulic drives Lubrication with oil Gear case Worm gear and Open gear Grease lubricator Rack pinion Steel cables Applicable by
Brands 32-46 for links Spur gears wheel Steel gear Open parts Elevating greasing Group
68-100 150-220-320 460-680 antifriction mechanisms
TOTAL Equivis ZS 32 Preslia 68 Carter EP 150 Carter EP 460 Ceran AD Plus Ceran WR 2 Ceran AD Plus Jet Marine
Equivis ZS 46 Preslia 100 Carter EP 220 Carter EP 480 Multis XHV 2 Multis MS 2 Multis XHV 2 Ceran AD Plus
Carter EP 320 Ceran MS
FINA Hydran HW 32 Hydran 68 Giran 150 Giran 460 Cabline 1630 Marson ELP Cabline Fluids Cabline Fluide
Cabline Fluide 2C
GULF Harmony 32
Harmony 46 AW Harmony 68 EP Lubricant EP Lubricant Lubcole N°1 Gulf Grown Lubcole N°1 Lubcole n°1
Hydraulic 32 Harmony 100 HD 150 HD 460 Fluid Lubcole Grease EP2 Fluyid Lubcole Fluid Lubcole 3
Hydraulic 46 220 EP Lubricant 3 spécial 3 spécial spécial
ATF Dexron II 320 R 680
HAFA Isodex 46 Statex 46 Caresol 220 Caresol 460 Barygrease Mouvan Barygrease SUPER 0
Gitol Grease Grease EP 0
MOBIL Mobil DTE 13M Mobil DTE Mobil gear 629 Mobil gear 634 Mobiltac 375NC Mobil grease Mobiltac 325NC Mobilarma 798
Mobil DTE 15M Heavy medium Mobil gear 630 Mobil gear 636 Mobiltac 325NC XHP222 Mobilgrease
Mobil DTE MOBIL GEAR 632 XHP222
Heavy
SHELL Shell Tellus Oil T 32 Shell Omala Shell Omala Shell Cardium Alvania R 3 Shell Malleus Shell Malleus
T 46 Oil 150 OiL680 EP fluid H Alvania EP 2 Fluid C Fluid C
Shell Malleus Calithia EP 2 Cardium EP
F>luid C Alvania G 2 Fluid H
TEXACO Rando Oil HDZ Texaco Rando Texaco Texaco Texaco Crater Texaco Multifak Texaco Texaco Crater
32-46 HD 68 MEROPA Meropa 680 2X Fluid EP 2 Crater 2X Fluid 2X Fluid
Texamatic Fluid 9226 150-220-320
TOTAL Equivis ZS-32 Preslia 46 Carter EP 150 Carter EP 460 Multis XHV 2 Ceran MS ou Multis Multis XHV 2 Multis XHV 2 ou
Equivis ZS-46 Preslia 100 Carter EP 220 Carter EP 680 MS 2 Carter ENS/EP 700
Carter EP 320
VEEDOL Veedol Veedol Veedol Veedol Veedol Amaciac TX Veedol Veedol VF 10/82
Hydraulic 46 Alturbrio Après Lube Après Lube Litho-MP Amaciac TX
58 AW 150-220-320 460 Veedol AP
Agillube 80
BR Marbrax HV32 Lubrax Lubrax Lubrax Lubrax Lubrax Lubrax Lubrax
Marbrax HV46 EGF-68-PS EGF-150-PS EGF-460-PS GBA-250-FL GSM 2 GBA-250-FL GBA-250-FL
EGF-100-PS EGF-220-PS EGF-680-PS
EGF-320-PS
STATOIL SL13-604

NOTE : La liste des fournisseurs dans ce tableau (établie par ordre alphabétique, sans indication préférentielle) n'est pas limitative.
Aucune des sociétés désignées ne peut se prévaloir d'une exclusivité de notre part.

NOTA: The list of suppliers in this table (established in alphabetical order and without any preferential priority) is not restrictive. None of the companies designed can claim exclusive rights on our behalf.

Rev 03 - G006
E02
14/10/13
E02 ABR
Rev. 01
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE Fol 1/1

MAINTENANCE OF ELECTROMECHANICAL CONTACTORS

We recommend to make periodical checking to make sure the working conditions of

the equipment are staying correct, ensuring then long life to the material.
• Check the cleanliness of the electro-magnet rectified surfaces which must never
be painted nor scratched (a very dirty electro-magnet can, if necessary, be
cleaned with acetone).
• Make sure that no useless part came inside the magnetic circuit.
• For contactor: never grind, nor clean, nor lubricate the contacts of main poles, the
wear coming from the opening under load having no bad effect.
• Check the correct tightening of the connections and of poles.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

If necessary, make a cleaning.

Verify connecting fitting.

REPLACEMENT OF A DEFECTIVE ELEMENT:

A defective element must be imperatively replaced by an element coming from

NOV-BLM origin after the cause of the destruction is eliminated.
If necessary, proceed to its adjustment.

REPLACEMENT OF A MOTOR

Respect the range of the phases for the connection. If the motor is not running in the
proper way, reverse the connection at the stator.

MAINTENANCE OF THE RELAYS

The contacts of the relays must never be cleaned or grinded because these
operations can damage the quality of the contacts and shorten considerably the life
duration.

REPAIR

Method for repairing:

Usually, in case of trouble-shooting:
• Check fuses and circuit-breakers.
• Check the feeding supply.
When a function is not carried out, refer to the parts list and look for the concerned
element, its mark together with the folio and the line where it appears.

E02-C150EF
E03
14/10/13
E03 ABR
Rev. 01
MECHANISM MAINTENANCE Fol 1/1

• Verify the oil levels by slackening back the level plugs on primary and planetary
gear cases (see E01)

• The reduction gear being at rest over a period of at least several hours, the oil
should flow from these openings.

• A lesser oil level for the primary and secondary reductions gears implies filling
through filling opening of the planet gear train.

• After condensation has formed inside the gear cases and is vented to the
atmosphere by the sniffing valve, loosen a drain plug/valve of the gear case in
order to ascertain any absence of water.

• An oil specimen analysis must be done once a year to make sure that the oil has
preserved its lubricating qualities. Change oil if necessary.

• Verify if there is no presence of oil leaks by the different gaskets.

WARNING

Inspection of the gears

• The inspection doors of the gear cases can be opened without difficulty (motors
being on stop).

• If an inspection of planet gear train must be necessary (abnormal noises, periodic

inspection for maintenance...), it must necessary to proceed to a complete
dismantling of jacking unit from the frame in order to dismantle the planet gear
train.

E03-C150EF
E04
18/11/13
E04 ABR
Rev.01
GEARS BEHAVIOUR Fol 1/5

The gears are designed to last 151 hours at Normal Jacking load, and 26 hours at
preload jacking.
The behaviour of the gears during the years is different between each type of gears.

1 - PRIMARY GEAR BOX

Those gears are visible through the cover.

The wearing of those gears will results in a slight burr at the tip end.
A sharp edge can be checked even at the very beginning of the life of the equipment.

Slight burr at the tip end that

can turn into a broken needle

This is not a detrimental phenomenon,

but if this occurs, the loading of the
jacking system (rig weight during jacking,
greasing condition, and lubrication) must
be checked carefully.

2 - SECONDARY GEAR BOX

It is not practicable to inspect planetary gear train without complete opening of the
gear box. This should be done only after a major incident (showing damage on the
main pinion for example) and in case of obvious overload.
The gear wearing will generate a large quantity of very thin metallic particles in the
oil. This is normal and does not create any problem.
As long as the ferro-metallic contamination of oil is normal, we recommend to do not
take into account the following elements in the oil analysis : Fe (iron), Ni (nickel), Cr
(chromium), Mo (molybdenum).

Large quantity of very thin

metallic particles in the oil

E04-C150EF
18/11/13
E04 ABR
Rev.01
GEARS BEHAVIOUR Fol 2/5

Internal Crown gear :.

Some scratches will appear

at the starting up, together
with a light “burring” of the tip
of the teeth

Satellite and solar gears :

Scratches and pitting may

appear.

3 - OUTPUT PINION
The output pinion will immediately show burrs at tip and root, together with a quick
wearing in the rack path. It is also possible that the burrs at tip of the teeth
are "broken out" during jacking.
The following wear acceptance criteria are applicable:
It concerns pinion used under normal loading (no overload) and adequate greasing.
Good looking of a pinion can not be considered as a pinion in good condition
(possible internal cracks due to fatigue)
A pinion with crack(s) must be thoroughly inspected to evaluate their depth and
location.

E04-C150EF
18/11/13
E04 ABR
Rev.01
GEARS BEHAVIOUR Fol 3/5

TYPE OF
INSPECTION METHOD CRITERIA
DEFAULT

Dye Penetrant Examination

NOT
CRACKS or
ACCEPTABLE
Magnetic Particle Inspection

Maximum
wearing :
WEARING
(REGULAR
13/32”
PATTERN)
(10 mm)
deep

Maximum size
of the “Tooth
Chips”
at tip :
TOOTH
1”x1/2”
CHIPS
3/8”deep
AT TIP
(30x10 mm
8 mm deep)

E04-C150EF
18/11/13
E04 ABR
Rev.01
GEARS BEHAVIOUR Fol 4/5

Maximum size
of the “Tooth
Chips”
On Face :
TOOTH
2”x 2”
CHIPS
¼”deep
ON FACE
(50 x 50 mm
6 mm deep)

Possible condition in
shipyard after the first
jacking trials, showing
burrs at root, together
with a wearing in the rack
path

E04-C150EF
18/11/13
E04 ABR
Rev.01
GEARS BEHAVIOUR Fol 5/5

Possible condition in
shipyard after the first
jacking trials, showing
burrs at tip, together with
a wearing in the rack path

Typical condition after full

life cycle (150 hours),
showing wearing in the
rack path of 5 to 8 mm

E04-C150EF
E05
14/10/13
E05 ABR
Rev. 01
MOTOR MAINTENANCE Fol 1/4

E05.1 MOTOR PART

• BEARINGS

The bearings used, of protected type at shaft end side and of dustproof type at
magnetic brake end so as to avoid any penetration of dust from friction linings, are
lubricated for life; consequently, they require no special maintenance.

• DISMANTLING OF MOTOR (See drawing 41003118)

-Set down the cover of terminal box and its gasket.

-Disconnect from the terminal bar all the cables coming from the magnetic brake,
from the micro contact and from the heating system.
-Set down the cover of magnetic brake (60).
-Set down the brake disc and its centre (56) (57).
-Set down the armature plate (55).
-Set down the yoke of magnetic brake.
-Pull out the rotor while taking care not to damage the sealing gasket of centering
nose.

• REASSEMBLY OF MOTOR

Proceed in reverse dismantling order while taking the following precautions:

-Make sure the sealing gasket of centering nose and ring (32) are in perfect
condition.
-Make the bearings are in good condition.
-Orientate correctly the armature plate (5) (housing placed opposite to the micro
switch operating catch)

• CHANGING OF DRIVE END BEARING

- Set down the rotor.

- Pull out the bearing (31) by means of an extractor with clips.

• CHANGING OF BEARING BRAKE SIDE (See drawing PMOT930)

-Set down the magnetic brake

-Remove the circlips (6)
-Place spacer (E) on shaft end.
-Set up the traverse (A) with the treaded rods (C) and washers (D).
-Heat the splined hub (4) and pull it out while tightening screw (B).
-Remove the pre stress washers (3) while respecting their order of assembly
(fig.1).
-The bearing (2) can then be pulled out by means of an extractor with clips.

E05-C150EF
14/10/13
E05 ABR
Rev. 01
MOTOR MAINTENANCE Fol 2/4

E05.2 MAGNETIC BRAKE F20 (See drawing PMOT940)

• MAINTENANCE

Verification of linings wear and leaning every year. The air gap can be measured
through the inspection opening placed at upper part of casing.
This air gap is evaluated at 2 to 2.5 mm in new condition. It can reach 6 mm
according to brake operation conditions.

IMPORTANT :
Beyond 6 mm, change the disc that carries linings.

• CLEANING

- Remove the dust reserve plug situated at lower part of casing and evacuate the
lining dust by blowing through opening.
- Make sure the blowing is carried out with dry air.

• DISC CHANGING

It is necessary to change the worn disc by one with new linings.

• SETTING DOWN OF WORN DISC (See drawings PMOT308)

- Take down the cover (7) while exercising care to leave in mesh two diametrically
opposed screws that will be loosened with care.
- Take out the worn disc carrying linings with the disc holding centre.
- Take down the thin disc by removing the fixation screws.
- Take out the armature plate (5).
- Empty the dust reserve and clean the whole magnetic brake.
• POSITIONING OF NEW DISC

Mount a disc fitted with new linings upon its centre, while exercising care:

- Replace the worn fixation screws and double brakes by these supplied with the
spare disc.
- Respect the position of securing ring (disc and shouldering).
- Tighten the screws with dynamometric spanner. Tightening torque: [Link].

E05-C150EF
14/10/13
E05 ABR
Rev. 01
MOTOR MAINTENANCE Fol 3/4

• FITTING BACK OF NEW DISC (See drawings PMOT950, PMOT308)

- Verify the dimension L.

- Fit back the armature plate (5) while exercising care to orient it correctly (housing
placed opposite the micro switch operating catch)
- Position the new disc with its hub.
- Fit back, in chronological order, the shims (61), the return washer (60) tighten the
screws (58).
- Make sure the disc does not rub against the armature plate before folding back
the rectangular brakes (57).
- Fit back the cover (7) along with gasket (9) after coating with sealing compound
type « PLASTEX », the supporting faces. These will have been carefully cleaned
beforehand.

• COMPLETE DISMANTLING OF MAGNETIC BRAKE (See drawings PMOT950,

PMOT308, PMOT930)

- Disconnect the feed cable between coil and magnetic brake.

- Take out the disc carrying linings along its centre.
- Set down armature plate (5)
- Set down the casing of magnetic brake.
- Take down the sleeve and springs assembly.
- Remove the circlips (6)
- Place spacer (E) on shaft end.
- Set up the traverse (A) with the treaded rods (C) and washers (D).
- Heat the splined hub (4) and pull it out while tightening screw (B).
- Remove the pre stress washers (3) while respecting assembly order (fig.1).
- The bearing (2) can then be pulled out by means of an extractor with clips.

• FITTING BACK OF MAGNETIC BRAKE

- Mount bearing if necessary.

- Position the pre stress washers while respecting their order of assembly.
- Mount the splined centre after heating it to 130°. Do not forget key.
- Fit back the casing of magnetic brake by joining the supporting faces between
one another. Tighten screws.
- Continue the assembly by proceeding in a direction opposed to dismantling
sequence.

E05-C150EF
10/10/13
E05 ABR
Rev. 01
MOTOR MAINTENANCE Fol 4/4

• ADJUSTMENT OF MICRO-SWITCH

It constitutes a safety feature making it possible to prevent any starting up of motor if

magnetic brake has remained jammed (an accidental cutting out of coil feed).
This adjustment is carried out in factory. It should be renewed only in case of micro
switch replacement.

To do so :

-Set down the cover

-Feed the coil of magnetic brake. The armature plate should come into thrust
position on casing.
-Adjust the positioning of support so that the micro switch will become engaged
when armature plate comes into thrust position on casing. Then adjust back the
microswitch position 1 mm in reverse way in order to guaranty its activation 1 mm
before thrust position.
-Block the support with screws and washers.

NOTE : It is possible to verify proper operation of micro switch with a signal lamp.

E05-C150EF
MAINTENANCE, DISMOUNTING, MOUNTING PROCEDURES
FOR F20 BRAKE ON JACKING MOTORS

Document number : 10929099-PRO

IND Modification Date Visa Vérif. Appr.

01 Issued for approval 04/06/14 EDU FMA
02 Seals replaced when the 04/09/14 EDU FMA
brake is fitting back, brake
torque deleted

1 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
SUMMARY

► SAFETY PRECAUTIONS…………………………………………………………………………. 3

► TOOLS REQUIRED………………………………………………………………………………... 3

► PRESENTATION OF THE BRAKE………………………………………………………………. 3

► MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING………………………………………………………………... 5

► PROCEDURE FOR DISMOUNTING THE BRAKE……………………………………………...7

STEP 1 : REMOVE THE BRAKE COVER………………………………………………….. 7

STEP 2 : REMOVE THE BRAKE DISC AND THE ARMATURE PLATE……………….. 9

STEP 3 : REMOVE THE BRAKE SPRING…………………………………………………. 10

► PROCEDURE FOR FITTING BACK THE BRAKE……………………………………………… 13

STEP 1 : INSTALL THE BRAKE SPRING,

THE STOP SPRING AND THE CIRCLIP.....…………………………………… 13

STEP 2 : INSTALL THE ARMATURE PLATE AND THE BRAKE DISC………………… 16

STEP 3 : INSTALL THE BRAKE COVER…………………………………………………... 19

2 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
► SAFETY PRECAUTIONS :

Before to start, read and fully understand this procedure.

Never dismount a motor undervoltage, danger of electric shock.

Ensure the correct procedure is followed to remove the motor torque

prior to starting this procedure.
Permit to work (PTW) and isolation should be put in place once motor
torque is release.

Extreme caution to be used, large amounts of stored energy

contained within the compressed spring which is inside this
brake assembly.

► TOOLS REQUIRED :

● Tool EF20 43999180 (10041618-001). This tool kit is required for the safe removal and
installation of the brake.

► PRESENTATION OF THE BRAKE :

● The brake on jacking motors is located as shown below.

The type of brake is a friction brake with a disc with linings without asbestos. When there is
no electric supply the motor is blocked. The braking is made when the linings are clenched
between the armature plate and the brake cover with the help of a strong brake spring. The
motor is free to rotate when the electric brake coil is fed.

3 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Drawing of a F20 brake (cutting) :

4 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
► MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING :

● Checking of linings wear and cleaning every 200 hours or every years.
The air-gap can be measured through the inspection opening mark A (use a 17 mm
spanner). This air-gap is evaluated at 2 to 2,5 mm in new condition, it can reach 6 mm
according to brake operating conditions.
When the checking is finished, do not forget to put back in place the plug mark A with its
seal.

IMPORTANT : beyond 6 mm, change the disc that carries the linings

● Cleaning :

Remove the dust reserve plug mark B and plug mark C (use a 34 mm spanner) and
evacuate the lining dust by blowing through the opening mark A.
When the cleaning is finished, do not forget to put back in place the plugs marks A, B and C
with their seals.

A B

5 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Adjustment of the micro-switch :

It constitutes a safety feature making it possible to prevent any starting up of motor if

magnetic brake has remained jammed (an accidental cutting out of coil feed or an
excessively ample air gap).

The adjustment is carried out in factory – it should be renewed only in case of micro switch
replacement.

How to do :

- Unscrew the screws mark A and remove the hood mark B and the gasket mark C.

- Feed the electric coil of magnetic brake : the armature plate should come into thrust
position on carcase.

- Unscrew a little the screw mark D and adjust the positioning of the micro-switch so that
it will become engaged when the armature plate comes into thrust position on casing.

- Then block the position with the screw mark D.

- When it's finished, put in place the gasket mark C (check it is in good condition), the
hood mark B and tight the screws mark A.

Nota :

It is possible to verify the suitable operation of micro-switch with a signal-lamp.

6 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
► PROCEDURE FOR DISMOUNTING THE BRAKE :

STEP 1 : REMOVE THE BRAKE COVER

● Remove the two screws shown below.

● Put in place the two threaded rods M12 40792015 (10029877-001), the two washers
40779912 (10029616-001) and the four nuts M12 9800001009 (10102139-001) as shown
below.

7 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Run washers and nuts up to the brake cover as shown below and then remove the four
others screws.

● Remove the brake cover, by using the nuts step by step as a control.

Nota :

If the circlip is failed and the brake cover screws removed, the energy in the spring
will be released and the brake disc, armature plate and the brake cover may violently
be released from the brake body, causing injury!

As the brake cover is removed back, if the circlip and spring are in place, then the brake
disc will remain in place as shown below. If it can be seen that the brake disc and the
armature plate are following the brake cover, then continue to use the nuts to control the
release of tension caused by the spring.

8 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
STEP 2 : REMOVE THE BRAKE DISC AND THE ARMATURE PLATE

● Once the brake cover is removed, the two plates 41099327 (10031575-001) and the two
screws 41099318 (10031409-001) can be fitted diametrally opposed. They will keep the
armature plate in place if the circlip is inadvertently removed.

● Now the brake disc can be safely removed and the splined sleeve and the housing can
be inspected.
If cleaning is required, first remove the bottom plug, then wash with Electra clean or blown
out with air (if washed that will require blowing out with air).

● Unscrew the two screws 41099318 (10031409-001) step by step and remove the two
plates 41099327 (10031575-001).

● Remove the armature plate.

9 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
STEP 3 : REMOVE THE BRAKE SPRING

● Put in place the beam 41099313 (10031366-001) on the two threaded rods 40792015
(10029877-001) with the two washers 40779912 (10029616-001) and the four nuts
9800001009 (10102139-001).

● Line up and insert the spacer 41099325 (10031509-001) on the stop spring and move the
beam 41099313 (10031366-001) until the position shown below.

IMPORTANT : Ensure the beam

sits in the notches of the spacer
to ensure no chance of slipping.

10 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Use a 19 mm spanner and tighten both nuts against the beam 41099313 (10031366-001)
and compress the spring sufficiently that the stop spring is cleared of the circlip sufficiently
enough to allow its removal.

Ensure you stand motor side whenever you are tightening the beam adjusting nuts
as shown below.

● Use the large circlip pliers provided in the tool kit and remove the large circlip that holds
the stop spring in place.

CAUTION :

AT THIS POINT, THE ONLY THING HOLDING BACK THE SPRING AND THE
RETAINING RING IS THE SPACER AND THE BEAM. PROCEED WITH CAUTION FOR
THE NEXT STEPS.

11 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Use a 19 mm spanner and slowly unscrew the both nuts until the spring tension is
released. You can expect the spring is extended as below until all tension is released.

Ensure you stand motor side whenever you are slackening the beam adjusting nuts
as shown below.

● With the tension off, the beam and the spacer can be removed.
That will allow access to change the circlip, the stop spring and the spring.

12 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
► PROCEDURE FOR FITTING BACK THE BRAKE :

STEP 1 : INSTALL THE SPRING, THE STOP SPRING AND THE CIRCLIP

● Use imperatively the good items for each new part mounted. Use wrong items for this
motor is dangerous for people and machinery. In particular, check the spot color located on
brake disc and the spring, they have to be of the same color.

If you use the original spring, the stop spring and the circlip, ensure a good visual and
physical inspection is carried out to ascertain if the parts are fit for reuse and putting back
into service.

● Install the spring, the stop spring and put the circlip in place, prior to put the spacer in
place. Try to line up as central as possible as there is a very fine tolerance to get the stop
spring to line up with the shaft and it's hard to adjust more than a few millimeters when the
spring is full compressed.

Do not forget to put the circlip in place now : as when the spring is compressed and
ready to install the circlip, it cannot be inserted into the spacer due to the motor
shaft.

13 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Use a 19 mm spanner and tighten both nuts against the beam 41099313 (10031366-001)
and compress the spring until the stop spring is flush with the coil housing to let free the
circlip groove (see photo below at left).

Ensure you stand motor side whenever you are tightening the beam adjusting nuts
as shown on picture below at right.

● Use the large circlip pliers provided in the tool kit and put in place the large circlip that
holds the stop spring in place.

Ensure the circlip is 100% sat in its correct groove and fully in place.

14 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● When you are absolutely sure that the circlip is in good place, use a 19 mm spanner
and slowly unscrew the both nuts until the spring tension is released. You can expect the
spring is extended as below until all tension is released.

Ensure you stand motor side whenever you are slackening the beam adjusting nuts
as shown below.

● With the tension off, the beam and the spacer can be removed.

15 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
STEP 2 : INSTALL THE ARMATURE PLATE AND THE BRAKE DISC

● Prepare a new brake disc :

Mount a new disc mark 2 upon its hub disc support mark 1 while take care about :

a) Use only new parts for marks 4 and 5.

b) The tightening torque is 3,2 [Link] for screws marks 5 (dry-mounting for
screws).

c) Respect the position of the blocking skirt mark 3 (the chamfer is turned toward
the brake disc).

d) Clean and degrease the linings.

16 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Clean and degrease the armature plate and put it in place.

If you decide to use the original armature plate, ensure a good visual and physical
inspection is carried out to ascertain if the parts are fit for reuse and putting back into
service.

Take care to orient the armature plate correctly (housing placed in front of the micro-
switch).

● Put in place the two plates 41099327 (10031575-001) and the two screws 41099318
(10031409-001) as shown below.

● Bring the armature plate in trust position by means of the screws 41099318 (10031409-
001).

● Put in place the new brake disc prepared previously.

The linings of the disc have to be in contact with the armature plate.

17 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Measure the dimension J.

● Adjust the thickness of the adjusting shim mark 8.

It is composed with many shims with thickness of 0,1 mm.

Shim's thickness should be : J - 0,5 mm.

Then, put it in place on the brake disc.

Put in place in chronological order, the flange mark 7, the shim mark 13, the tab locks
marks 10 and tight the screws marks 5 (dry-mounting for screws).

Nota :

The part mark 13 is also a shim (thickness fixed 1,5 mm). It can be used like the shim mark
8 when a disc brake with linings not new is remounted.

18 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Make sure the disc does not rub against the armature plate before folding back the tab
locks marks 10.

● Release the armature plate by loosening the screws 41099318 (10031409-001).

● Take down the two plates 41099327 (10031575-001).

STEP 3 : INSTALL THE BRAKE COVER

● Clean and degrease the braking side of the brake cover.

● Replace the O ring by a new one and put it on the brake cover.

19 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Put in place the two threaded rods M12 40792015 (10029877-001), the two washers
40779912 (10029616-001) and the four nuts M12 9800001009 (10102139-001) and run
washers and nuts up to the brake cover as shown below.

● Bolt four screws M12 to fix the brake cover.

Nota : Ensure the washers are fitted in place.

● Remove the two threaded rods M12 40792015 (10029877-001) and bolt the two others
screws M12.

Nota : Ensure the 2 washers are fitted in place as the previous step.

20 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
● Prior to re-torqueing the motor, the brake will need to be tested to ensure full holding
capacity is available.

Use a torque wrench and socket and check the brake torque is above the minimum brake
torque.

Nota :

It is common for a new disc to not hold the first time. The motor will require torqueing then
releasing a couple of times until its established the brake will hold the torque as mentioned
above.

● Replaced by new the 4 seals located on the brake carcase and the brake cover (in A, B,
C and D) :

C D

A B

21 / 21
10929099-PRO ind 02
E06
NOV-BLM
15, rue de la Métallurgie
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX
France
Phone : 33 2 40 68 36 00
Fax : 33 2 40 68 36 10 / 22
[Link] : blm@[Link]

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

C150EF JACKING UNIT

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 1 / 30

ISSUED CHKD APPD
REV DESCRIPTION DATE DATE DATE
BY BY BY
01 FIRST RELEASE ABR 14/04/2014 FMA 14/04/2014 FDE 14/04/2014
02 Paragraph 5.5 updated FMA 14/05/2014 FMA 14/05/2014 / /

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 2 / 30

1. Introduction
The purpose of this document is to propose a maintenance schedule with some detailed
procedures and a list of tasks to check during a jacking operation (in the same way of the
maintenance schedule) to preserve the long life time of the equipment.

In order to keep all the equipment in correct condition, we suggest some periodical checks to
be done by the rig staff (mechanical or electrical team and the barge master) and a 5 year
inspection by a service engineer from the manufacturer (NOV-BLM).

2. Summary
NOV-BLM 1

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. SUMMARY 3

3. CAUTION 6

4. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 7

4.1. MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE 7

4.2. ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE 8

5. MECHANICAL CONTROLS PROCEDURE 10

5.1. MOTOR 10
5.1.1. BRAKE LINING THICKNESS 10
5.1.2. BRAKE LINING STATUS 10
5.1.3. BRAKE LINING CLEANING 10
5.1.4. PRESENCE OF OIL/WATER 10
5.1.5. ABNORMAL HEAT 10
5.1.6. GASKETS STATUS 11
5.1.7. CORROSION 11
5.1.8. SPARE PARTS 12
5.2. PRIMARY GEARBOX 13
5.2.1. OIL LEVEL 13
5.2.2. PRESENCE OF WATER 13
5.2.3. OIL SAMPLING 13
5.2.4. OIL REPLACEMENT 13
5.2.5. ABNORMAL NOISE 13
5.2.6. CORROSION 13
5.2.7. GASKET STATUS 14
5.2.8. MECHANICAL INSPECTION 14
5.2.9. SPARE PARTS 15
5.3. SECONDARY GEARBOX 16
5.3.1. PRINCIPAL VERSION 17
[Link]. Oil level 17
[Link]. Presence of water 17

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 3 / 30

[Link]. Oil sampling 17
[Link]. Oil replacement 17
5.3.2. ALTERNATE VERSION 17
[Link]. Oil level 17
[Link]. Presence of water 17
[Link]. Oil sampling 18
[Link]. Oil replacement 18
5.3.3. ABNORMAL NOISE 18
5.3.4. CORROSION 18
5.3.5. MECHANICAL INSPECTION 18
5.4. CLIMBING PINIONS 19
5.4.1. GREASING 19
5.4.2. PHYSICAL INTEGRITY (CHAPTER E4 – GEAR BEHAVIOUR) 19
5.4.3. MECHANICAL INSPECTION 19
5.5. MOUNTING PARTS FOR JACK FRAME 20
5.6. HEIGHT SENSOR 21
5.6.1. OIL LEVEL 21
5.6.2. SPRING TENSION 21
5.6.3. FREE ROTATION 21
5.6.4. INDUCTIVE SENSORS 21
5.6.5. CORROSION 21
5.6.6. SPARE PARTS 22
5.7. LONG “STAND-BY” 23
5.7.1. LUBRICATION OF THE PRIMARY GEARBOX 23
5.7.2. GEARBOXES PROTECTION 23
5.8. ALL EQUIPMENT 23
5.8.1. GENERAL INSPECTION 23

6. ELECTRICAL CONTROLS PROCEDURE 24

6.1. ELECTRICAL CABINETS (MCC) 24

6.1.1. CABINETS CLEANLINESS 24
6.1.2. TIGHTNESS OF CONNECTIONS 24
6.1.3. HEATERS STATUS 24
6.1.4. AIR FAN STATUS 24
6.1.5. CIRCUIT BREAKERS STATUS 24
6.2. MOTOR BRAKE 25
6.2.1. INSULATION TEST 25
6.2.2. WINDING TEST 25
6.3. MOTOR (ROTOR/STATOR) 25
6.3.1. HEATERS STATUS 25
6.3.2. INSULATION TEST 25
6.3.3. WINDING TEST 25
6.4. MOTOR 26
6.4.1. TIGHTNESS OF CONNECTIONS 26
6.5. CONSOLE 26
6.5.1. HEATERS STATUS 26
6.5.2. PUSH BUTTON TEST 26
6.5.3. BULB AND SOUND TEST. 26
6.5.4. RUNNING TEST 26
6.6. HEIGHT SENSORS 27

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 4 / 30

6.6.1. INDUCTIVE SENSORS TEST 27
6.7. PINION LOAD SENSOR (PLMS) 27
6.7.1. RUNNING TEST 27
6.8. LOCAL EMERGENCY JACKING BOX 27
6.8.1. RUNNING TEST (PUSH BUTTONS) 27
6.8.2. RUNNING TEST (LAMP TEST) 28
6.8.3. RUNNING TEST 28
6.9. ALL EQUIPMENT 28
6.9.1. GENERAL INSPECTION 28

7. LOAD SENSOR TEST ORGANOGRAM 29

8. RECOMMENDATION 30

8.1. PROTECTION WAX 30

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 5 / 30

3. CAUTION

Before any work on the equipment, refer to the user manual, in which it is detailed all the
safety cautions to take, and procedures detailing the different steps of mounting /
dismounting and drawings.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 6 / 30

4. Maintenance schedule
The maintenance frequencies described in the following time tables are only applicable for a C150EF jacking unit being used into its scope of design, in
terms of loads applied and following of procedures. Please, refer to the user manual.

4.1. Mechanical Maintenance

*Op: 4-6 Op means to be done every 4 to 6 operations.

Maintenance Frequency Replacement

3 6 1 5 Job
Location Inspection *Op Frequency or case
Months Months Year year done by
Motor Brake Brake lining thickness X If the gap is over 6 mm Rig staff
Brake lining status X If worn or broken Rig staff
Brake lining cleaning X 4-6 N/A Rig staff
Presence of water/oil X N/A Rig staff
Abnormal heat 4-6 N/A Rig staff
Gasket status X 5 years Rig staff
Motor (Rotor/stator) Abnormal heat 4-6 N/A Rig staff
Gasket status X 5 years Rig staff
Corrosion X N/A Rig staff
Primary gearbox Oil level X 2-3 N/A Rig staff
Presence of water X 2-3 N/A Rig staff
Oil sampling for analysis X According to analysis Rig staff
Oil replacement N/A 5 years Rig staff
Abnormal noise 4-6 N/A Rig staff
Corrosion X N/A Rig staff
Gasket status X 5 years Rig staff
Mechanical inspection X N/A Manufacturer
Secondary gearbox Oil level X N/A Rig staff
Presence of water X N/A Rig staff
Oil sampling for analysis X According to analysis Rig staff
Oil replacement N/A 5 years Rig staff
Abnormal noise 4-6 N/A Rig staff
Corrosion X N/A Rig staff
Gasket status X 5 years Rig staff

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 7 / 30

Maintenance Frequency Replacement
3 6 1 5 Job
Location Inspection *Op Frequency or case
Months Months Year year done by
Mechanical inspection X N/A Manufacturer
Climbing pinion Greasing All N/A Rig staff
Physical integrity 4-6 N/A Rig staff
Mechanical inspection X N/A Manufacturer
Height sensors Oil level X 5 years Rig staff
Spring tension X 10 years Rig staff
Free rotation All N/A Rig staff
Corrosion X N/A Rig staff
Long "Stand-By" Lubrication of the primary gearbox X N/A Rig staff
Protection of the secondary gearbox X N/A Rig staff
All equipment General inspection X N/A Manufacturer

4.2. Electrical Maintenance

Frequency Inspection made by

Location Inspection 3 6 1 5 Job
*Op
Months Months Year year done by
Electrical cabinets (MCC) Cabinet’s cleanliness X Rig staff
Tightness of the connections X Rig staff
Heaters X Rig staff
Air fan status X Rig staff
Circuit breakers All Rig staff
Motor brake Insulation All Rig staff
Winding All Rig staff
Motor (Rotor/stator) Heater X Rig staff
Insulation All Rig staff
Windings All Rig staff
Motor (junction box) Tightness of the connections X Rig staff
Console Heaters X Rig staff
Console (push buttons) Running test All Barge Master
Console (Lamp test) Running test All Barge Master

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 8 / 30

Frequency Inspection made by
Location Inspection 3 6 1 5 Job
*Op
Months Months Year year done by
Console Running test All Barge Master
Height sensors Running test All Rig staff
Pinion load sensors Running test All Rig staff
Local emergency jacking boxes (push buttons) Running test All Barge Master
Local emergency jacking boxes (Lamp test) Running test All Barge Master
Local emergency jacking boxes Running test All Barge Master
All equipment General X Manufacturer

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 9 / 30

5. Mechanical Controls procedure

5.1. Motor

5.1.1. Brake lining thickness

1- Open the brake lining plug (1)
2- Measure the gap with a long filler gage
3- Record the value
4- Close the brake lining plug (1)
5- Report any problem
6- Report if the plug is damaged
7- Report if the measured gap is over 5 mm.

5.1.2. Brake lining status

1- Open the motor-brake cover (3)
2- Remove the brake lining disk
3- Observe the brake lining status
4- Close the motor brake cover
5- Report any problem
6- Report if the O-ring is damaged
7- Report if the brake lining is damaged
8- Report if one (or more) of the six thread is damaged.

5.1.3. Brake lining cleaning

1- Open the brake lining plug (1)
2- Open the water drain plug (5)
3- Blow some compressed air to remove internal dust
4- Report any problem
5- Report if any water/oil is going out when opening the water drain plug
6- Report if anything else than dust is going out when blowing.

5.1.4. Presence of Oil/Water

1- Open the drain plug (5)
2- Observe the presence of water and/or oil
3- Report any problem
4- Report any presence of oil and water
5- Report if the drain plug is damaged.

5.1.5. Abnormal heat

During jacking operation and while the motor is running
1- Observe any abnormal heat
2- Report any problem
3- Report any hot surface
4- Report any smoke

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 10 / 30

5.1.6. Gaskets status
1- Observe the status of the gaskets for:
- The micro switch cover (6)
- Motor shaft plug (4)
- Terminal box (2)
2- Report any problem.

5.1.7. Corrosion
1- Observe the status of any corroded parts
2- Report any problem
3- Report the location where paint must be applied
4- Report any rusty parts to be replaced as soon as possible.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 11 / 30

5.1.8. Spare parts

Operation: It is the operation done which require the part to be changed.

Drawing: Find the drawings into the user manual.
Quantity: The quantities indicated are for one (1) electrical motor.
Mandatory: The part must be change if dismounted.
Other listed parts are highly recommended while may put the equipment out of service.

Part number Description Operation Drawing Mark Quantity Mandatory

10030584-001 Seal When dismounting the rotor 41003118 M1 1 Yes
10030546-001 O ring When dismounting the motor from the jacking unit 41003118 M2 1 Yes
10029198-001 Elastic ring When dismounting the rotor 41003118 5 1 Yes
10030618-001 Bearing When dismounting the rotor 41003118 31 1 Yes
10102353-001 Elastic ring When dismounting the rotor 41003118 34 1 Yes
10030612-001 Bearing When dismounting the rotor 41003118 35 1 Yes
10030510-001 Spring washer When dismounting the rotor 41003118 36 16 Yes
10078382-001 Screw When dismounting the rotor 41003118 69 4
10035288-001 Gasket When dismounting brake assembly 41003118 62 1
10102411-001 Screw When dismounting brake assembly 41003118 51 6
10078382-001 Screw When dismounting brake assembly 41003118 63 6
10035319-001 Gasket When opening the terminal box 41003118 A4 1
10046851-001 Screw When opening the terminal box 41003118 A5 8
10046832-001 Screw When opening the terminal box 41003118 A7 2
10029973-001 Screw When opening the terminal box 41003118 C3 6
10035320-001 Gasket When opening the terminal box 41003118 C2 1
10035310-001 Gasket When opening the micro switch cover 41003118 S2 1
10080547-001 Screw When opening the micro switch cover 41003118 S3 4
10036486-001 Plug When checking presence of water/oil into the brake/motor 41003118 R 1

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 12 / 30

5.2. Primary gearbox

5.2.1. Oil level

1- Open the oil level plug (2)
2- Observe the oil level
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the oil level is too low
5- Report if the oil level is too high.

5.2.2. Presence of water

1- Open the drain plug (3)
2- Report any problem
3- Report any presence of water
4- Report if the drain plug is damaged.

5.2.3. Oil sampling

1- Open the oil level plug (2)
2- Pick up an oil sample for analysis
3- Report any problem
4- Report the quality of the oil.

5.2.4. Oil replacement

According to the oil analysis (chapter 5.2.3), the oil will be changed
1- Open the oil level drain plug (3)
2- Open the oil level fill-in plug (1)
3- Remove oil by gravity; not using any compressed air
4- Close the oil drain plug (3)
5- Fill-in with new oil
6- Close the oil fill-in plug (1).

5.2.5. Abnormal noise

During jacking operation and while the motor is running
1- Pay attention to any abnormal noise,
mainly hearing next to the bearing boxes (4)
2- Report any problem
3- Report the location of any abnormal noise
4- Report the kind of noise (frequency, level, etc.).

5.2.6. Corrosion
1- Observe the status of any corroded parts
2- Report any problem
3- Report the location where paint
must be applied
4- Report any rusty parts to be replaced
as soon as possible.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 13 / 30

5.2.7. Gasket status
1- Observe the gasket status of the top cover (5)
2- Report any problem
3- Report if the rubber gasket is to be changed
4- Report if any bolt thread is damaged
5- Report if any bolt is missing (oil leak hazard).

5.2.8. Mechanical inspection

This general mechanical inspection is to be done by a service engineer from the
manufacturer. Inspection plan is following:
1- All periodical inspection points are done
2- Random gearboxes are inspected to observe the status of wheels and pinions
3- All climbing pinions are inspected
4- A final inspection report is delivered giving a status of the jacking system.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 14 / 30

5.2.9. Spare parts

Operation: It is the operation done which require the part to be changed.

Drawing: Find the drawings into the user manual.
Quantity: The quantities indicated are for one (1) Primary gear box.
Mandatory: The part must be change if dismounted.
Other listed parts are highly recommended while may put the equipment out of service.

Part number Description Operation Drawing Mark Quantity Mandatory

10102104-001 Plug When checking/draining oil 10723804-10723805 52 1
10102200-001 Gasket When checking/draining oil 10723804-10723805 51 1
10102137-001 Plug When checking/draining oil 10723804-10723805 54 1
10102201-001 Gasket When checking/draining oil 10723804-10723805 53 1
10102201-001 Gasket When checking/draining oil/filing oil/oil level 10723804-10723805 61 4
10063418-001 Plug When checking/draining oil/filing oil/oil level 10723804-10723805 62 4
10087690-001 Bearing When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 6 1 Yes
10087686-001 Bearing When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 11 2 Yes
10102401-001 Screw When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 14 6
10062369-001 O ring When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 24 1 Yes
10087729-001 Bearing When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 19 1 Yes
10087728-001 Bearing When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 20 1 Yes
10102348-001 Elastic ring When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 21 1 Yes
10102355-001 Elastic ring When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 22 1 Yes
10095969-001 O ring When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 27 1 Yes
10102401-001 Screw When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 30 7
10059438-001 Bearing When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 41 1 Yes
10082156-001 Bearing When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 39 1 Yes
10030192-001 Screw When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 33 6
10062371-001 O ring When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 34 42 Yes
10079489-001 O ring When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 47 42 Yes
10094988-001 Screw When opening the gearbox 10723804-10723805 49 42 Yes
10102400-001 Screw When opening the top cover / presence of water 10723804-10723805 60 8
10084783-001 Sniffing valve When opening the top cover / presence of water 10723804-10723805 63 1
10819223-001 Gasket When opening the top cover / presence of water 10723804-10723805 58 1

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 15 / 30

5.3. Secondary gearbox

For the Principal Version go to Section 5.3.1.:

For the Alternate Version go to Section 5.3.2.:

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 16 / 30

5.3.1. Principal Version

[Link]. Oil level

1- Open the oil level plug (1)
2- Observe the oil level
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the oil level is too low
5- Report if the oil level is too high.

[Link]. Presence of water

1- Remove the drain plug (3) and open the valve (4)
2- Report any problem
3- Report any presence of water
4- Report if the drain plug or the valve is damaged
5- Close the valve (4) and put back the drain plug (3).

[Link]. Oil sampling

1- Open the oil level plug (1)
2- Pick up an oil sample for analysis
3- Report any problem
4- Report the quality of the oil.

[Link]. Oil replacement

According to the oil analysis (chapter 5.2.3), the oil will be changed
1- Remove the drain plug (3) and open the valve (4)
2- Open the oil level fill-in plug (2)
3- Remove oil by gravity; not using any compressed air
4- Close the valve (4) and put back the drain plug (3)
5- Fill-in with new oil
6- Close the oil fill-in plug (2).

5.3.2. Alternate Version

[Link]. Oil level

1- Remove the drain plug (3), connect the level hose (1) and open the valve (4)
2- Observe the oil level
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the oil level is too low
5- Report if the oil level is too high.

[Link]. Presence of water

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 17 / 30

[Link]. Oil sampling
1- Remove the drain plug (3) and open the valve (4)
2- Pick up an oil sample for analysis
3- Report any problem
4- Report the quality of the oil.

[Link]. Oil replacement

5.3.3. Abnormal noise

During jacking operation and while the motor is running
1- Pay attention to any abnormal noise
2- Report any problem
3- Report the location of any abnormal noise
4- Report the kind of noise (frequency, level, etc.).

5.3.4. Corrosion
1- Observe the status of any corroded parts
2- Report any problem
3- Report the location where paint must be applied
4- Report any rusty parts to be replaced as soon as possible.

5.3.5. Mechanical inspection

This general mechanical inspection is to be done by a service engineer from the
manufacturer. Inspection plan is following:
1- All periodical inspection points are inspected
2- Random gearboxes are inspected to observe the status of wheels and pinions
3- All climbing pinions are inspected
4- A final inspection report is delivered as a status of the jacking system.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 18 / 30

5.4. Climbing pinions

5.4.1. Greasing
1- Observe to grease the climbing pinions during jacking operation
2- Report any problem.

5.4.2. Physical integrity (Chapter E4 – Gear Behaviour)

1- Observe the climbing pinion
2- Report any problem.

5.4.3. Mechanical inspection

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 19 / 30

5.5. Mounting parts for Jack frame

Wearing criteria for pinion bushing :

IDN (Max Internal Diameter for New Bushing) : 390.6 mm

390.6 < IDN < 393.6 Fair Condition ( Level 3 )

393.6 < IDN < 395.6 Replacement to be planned ( Level 4 )

395.6 < IDN Urgent Replacement Required ( Level 5 )

Bushing

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 20 / 30

5.6. Height sensor

5.6.1. Oil level

1- Open the oil level plug of the reduction box (1)
2- Observe the oil level
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the oil level is too low
5- Report if the oil level is too high.

5.6.2. Spring tension

1- Observe the tension of the height sensor spring (5), the idle
pinion must not be disengaged easily
2- Report any problem
3- Change the spring if broken.

5.6.3. Free rotation

1- Observe the free rotation (by hand) of the idle pinion (3) on
a ¼ of a turn
2- Report any problem
3- Inspect the gearbox in case the rotation is not free by hand.

5.6.4. Inductive sensors

4- Observe the inductive sensors (2) are blinking when metallic
part (4) is activating them
5- Report any problem
6- Change inductive sensors if they are not showing correct behavior.

5.6.5. Corrosion
5- Observe the status of any corroded parts
6- Report any problem
7- Report the location where paint must be applied
8- Report any rusty parts to be replaced
as soon as possible.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 21 / 30

5.6.6. Spare parts

Operation: It is the operation done which require the part to be changed.

Drawing: Find the drawings into the user manual.
Quantity: The quantities indicated are for one (1) Secondary gear box.
Mandatory: The part must be change if dismounted.
Other listed parts are highly recommended while may put the equipment out of service.

Part number Description Operation Drawing Mark Quantity Mandatory

10025560-001 Spring When the spring is too loose 3101119 1-4 1 Yes
10089300-001 Bush When the support is stuck 3101119 1-7 4 Yes
10007721-001 Axle When the support is stuck 3101119 1-13 2 Yes
10025271-001 Stop plate When the support is stuck 3101119 1-14 2
10102521-001 Screw When the support is stuck 3101119 1-15 4
10047069-001 Washer When the support is stuck 3101119 1-16 4
10097350-001 Proximity switch When the inductive sensors don’t flash / no signal 3101119 15 2 Yes
10079355-001 Reduction gear When the idle pinion is stuck / doesn’t turn freely 3101119 2 1 Yes

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 22 / 30

5.7. Long “Stand-By”

5.7.1. Lubrication of the primary gearbox

During long stay position of the rig, it’s necessary to proceed to the lubrication of the
(primary) gearboxes by splashing oil
1- Select the “Retorque” Mode
2- Select the motors
3- Record the actual value of the torque
4- Retorque at 0%
5- Select 30% retorque selection
6- Retorque to approach (+/- 50 tons) the recorded value
7- Repeat step 2 to 6 for all motors.

5.7.2. Gearboxes protection

During long stay position of the rig, it’s necessary to proceed to the lubrication of the
gearboxes (primary and secondary)
1- Open the manhole access cover (See chapter 5.2 and 5.3 of this document)
2- Spray some protection wax Protan ® (See chapter 8.1 of this document)

5.8. All equipment

5.8.1. General inspection

This general inspection is to be done by a service engineer from the manufacturer plant.
Inspection plan is following:
1- All periodical inspection points are inspected
2- Random gearboxes are inspected to observe the status of wheels and pinions
3- All climbing pinions are inspected
4- A final inspection report is delivered as a status of the jacking system.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 23 / 30

6. Electrical controls procedure

6.1. Electrical cabinets (MCC)

6.1.1. Cabinets cleanliness

1- Open the MCC (Motor control cabinet)
2- Observe the cleanliness of the cabinets
3- Clean the electrical components in case of dust (covering components)
4- Pay attention to clean up without power supply or typical procedure with power supply
5- Observe any broken devices and replace them
6- Report any problem
7- Heavy dust atmosphere to be reported
8- Report any broken parts (to be replaced as soon as possible).

6.1.2. Tightness of connections

1- Open the MCC (Motor control cabinet)
2- Observe the tightness of the connections
3- Report any problem.

6.1.3. Heaters status

MCC case
1- Open the MCC
2- Measure the current from each heater supply connection.

Control Console case

1- Open the control console doors
2- Measure the current from each heater supply connection
3- Report any problem.

6.1.4. Air fan status

1- From the MCC doors
2- Observe the air fan running
3- Report any problem.

6.1.5. Circuit breakers status

1- Open the MCC (Motor control cabinet)
2- Observe the position of each circuit breaker
3- Report any problem
4- Report the (known) reason of a “Off” circuit breaker
5- Report and research for the unknown reason of an “Off” circuit breaker.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 24 / 30

6.2. Motor brake

6.2.1. Insulation test

1- Open the MCC
2- Measure the insulation of each component (motor windings)
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the insulation is lower than 1Kohm per Volt
5- Report and repair if the insulation is showing a short circuit.

6.2.2. Winding test

1- Open the MCC
2- Measure the motor windings of each motor
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the motor winding is not correct
5- Report and repair if the insulation is showing a short circuit.

6.3. Motor (Rotor/stator)

6.3.1. Heaters status

MCC case
1- Open the MCC
2- Measure the current from each heater supply connection.

Console console case

1- Open the console doors
2- Measure the current from each heater supply connection
3- Report any problem.

6.3.2. Insulation test

6.3.3. Winding test

1- Open the MCC
2- Measure the motor windings of each motor
3- Report any problem
4- Report if the motor winding is not correct
5- Report and repair if the insulation is showing a short circuit.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 25 / 30

6.4. Motor

6.4.1. Tightness of connections

1- Open the motor terminal box
2- Observe the tightness of the connections
3- Report any problem.

Note: a particular attention must be paid as the heaters are continuously supplied. They must
be switched off for this inspection.

6.5. Console

6.5.1. Heaters status

MCC case
3- Open the MCC
4- Measure the current from each heater supply connection.

Console console case

4- Open the console doors
5- Measure the current from each heater supply connection
6- Report any problem.

6.5.2. Push button test

From the console when it’s “Off” (not supplied)
1- Press all buttons (one by one)
2- Observe if all of them are coming back to off position
3- Report any problem
4- Change any button showing any abnormal behavior.

6.5.3. Bulb and sound test.

From the console when it’s “On” (supplied)
1- Press the “Lamp Test” button
2- Observe if all of lamp bulb are “On”
3- Hear if the buzzer is sounding
4- Report any problem
5- Change any lamp bulb or buzzer if they are any abnormal behavior.

6.5.4. Running test

A running test must be done before any jacking operation, in order to make sure that the
console is operational (ready to use at all times).
1- Execute a jacking operation on a short distance
2- Observe no any problem during this action
3- Report any problem.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 26 / 30

6.6. Height sensors

6.6.1. Inductive sensors test

From the height sensor (top of the jack frame) when MCC is “On” (supplied)
1- Rotate the idle pinion (a ¼ of a turn max)
2- Observe if the sensors are lighting “On” and “Off”
3- Report any problem
4- Change any inductive sensor in case of any abnormal behavior.

6.7. Pinion load sensor (PLMS)

6.7.1. Running test

From the console when MCC is “On” (supplied)

1- Select the “Retorque” Mode

2- Select the motors
3- Record the actual value of the torque
4- Retorque at 0%
5- Check the displayed value is “0 tons”
6- Retorque at 30%, then 60% until to approach (+/- 100 tons) the recorded value (step
3)
7- Repeat step 2 to 6 for all motors.
8- Report any problem.

According to the problem met during this test please proceed to chapter 7 of this document,
and follow the diagram to solve the problem

6.8. Local emergency jacking box

6.8.1. Running test (Push buttons)

From the central control console:

1- Push all buttons (one by one)

2- Observe that each buttons come back to its original position
3- Report any problem
4- Change any button showing an abnormal behavior

From the local emergency jacking boxes:

1- Push all buttons (one by one)

2- Observe that each buttons come back to its original position
3- Report any problem
4- Change any button showing an abnormal behavior.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 27 / 30

6.8.2. Running test (Lamp test)
From the central control console:
1- Push the lamp test button
2- Observe that each lamp buttons are lightning
3- Report any problem
4- Change any bulb showing an abnormal behavior.

From the local emergency jacking boxes:

1- Push the lamp test button
2- Observe that each lamp buttons are lightning
3- Report any problem
4- Change any bulb showing an abnormal behavior.

6.8.3. Running test

A running test must be done every jacking operation, in order to make sure that all
emergency consoles are operational (ready to use at all times).
1- Execute a jacking operation on a short distance
2- Observe no any problem during this action
3- Report any problem.

6.9. All equipment

6.9.1. General inspection

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 28 / 30

7. Load sensor test organogram

Test of a load
sensor

Select a motor
Record the actual value
Retorque at 0 % Troubleshooting

0 tons displayed ?
Load sensor alive ?

Retorque to original
value with 30%
selection or more Electrical zero reset

New val = old val ? Zero out of Range ?

End of test
Mechanical Zero reset

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 29 / 30

8. Recommendation

8.1. Protection wax

Protan ® is a protection wax to be sprayed or applied manually, made by:

CARAL
5, rue du Fond du Val
27600 Saint Pierre-la-Garenne
France

+33 2 32 52 42 60

To apply any other brand of wax, please contact NOV-BLM.

ABR – 14/04/2014 – Rev.02 E06 – C150EF Page 30 / 30

E07
E08
3/02/11
SDA
SERVICE STATIONS Ind. B
Fol 1/1

W
WOOR
RLLW
WIID
DEEP
PRRO
ODDU
UCCTTS
SAAN
NDDS
SEER
RVVIIC
CEES
SS UP
SU PP
POOR
RTT
For any assistance, please contact :

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO

NOV - BLM
Service Department
15, rue de la Métallurgie
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX
France
services-BLM@[Link]
Phone/Tel : (33) 2 40 68 36 00
Fax : (33) 2 40 68 36 22

NOV-BLM Service Department can provide you a 24

hours a day assistance and connect you to the NOV
Service Station in charge of your region when needed
E09
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 1 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

AUTOTRANSFORMER :
OVERHEATING
AT autotransformer warning Thermistors faulty Check the three thermistors on
against the overtemperature autotransformer SL1/SL2/SL3. The contact
windings. It's impossible to is normally close and it will be open when
retorque. one of the thermistor detect an overheating.
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
AT. CONTACTOR FAULT
Discrepancy between the Contactors failure Check the contactor coil and connection
output and feedback input of
AT contactor Auxiliary contact circuit Check the contact and connection
failure
Thermal overload relay Check the contact and connection
failure (RT)
RM relay failure Check the relay and connection
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
BRAKE CIRCUIT BREAKER
: TRIPPED
Circuit breaker of brake Circuit breaker is Check the circuit breaker position and find
transformer is off tripped the short circuit
Circuit breaker is Check the circuit breaker position
switched off
Auxiliary contact circuit This contact will be closed when the breaker
breaker is ON.
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 2 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

BRAKE : FAULT
When brake is energized, Limit brake switch (S2- Check contact : contact normally open
limit brake switch is ON S3) (brake applied, not energized) and contact
(close). close (brake released, energized). If the
contact stay closed without energy in the
brake, adjust the limit switch, following the
adjusting procedure.
Brake failure In local mode with release brake box or in
retorquing position, position “0 %”. Listen to
the brake if a noise coming.
Brake coil failure Check coil resistance value (Y1-Y2 )
Value is near
Contactors failure Check the 2 contactors, the diode modulus
and varistor. Normal sequence is EF1 & EF2
energized and after 1 second, EF1
desenergized. EF2 is enough to hold the
brake open
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
RM relay failure Check the relay and connection
Brake transformer Check brake transformer primary voltage.
circuit breaker failure
Brake transformer Check brake transformer secondary
failure voltages.
BRAKE : MANUALLY
RELEASED
When brake is released Brake open Check that brake isn't mechanically applied
mechanically, limit brake (2 screws on covers tighten without
switch is ON (close). spacers).
Brake limit switch (S2- Check contact: contact normally open (brake
S3) applied, not energized) and contact close
(brake released, energized). If the contact
stay closed without energy in the brake,
adjust the limit switch, following the adjusting
procedure.
I/O modulus failure Check EF1 or EF2 contactors aren't
energized.
If it is not, check cables, plugs, between
output coupling connector and output
modulus, then check the output coupling
connector and the output modulus
EF1 or EF2 contactors Check brake supply voltage (Y1-Y2).
failure If the brake is supplied, check the
contactors.
Brake failure Check the brake.

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 3 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

DESK : EMERGENCY STOP
The mushroom emergency Mushroom button is
stop is pushed on the central pushed Check and release
control console Mushroom button
failure Check the contact and connection
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
DESK : I/O MODULUS
FAULT
Ethernet I/O modulus I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
diagnostic connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
LEG : HIGH LIMIT STOP
Leg position Check leg position
Sensor failure Check sensor and connection
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
LEG : LOW LIMIT STOP
Leg position Check leg position
Push on the message leg limit for override
Sensor failure Check sensor and connection
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
LEG : RACK CHOCK IS
NOT DISENGAGED
Rack chock position Check visually the rack chock position
Push on the message rack chock status for
override
Sensor failure Check sensor and connection
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 4 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

LOAD SENSOR : FAULT
The sensor signal is more Sensor failure
than 20mA Check the sensor signal
The zero setting is more than I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
2mA connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
LOCAL : EMERGENCY
STOP
The emergency stop Mushroom button is
mushroom button is pushed pushed Check and release
on the emergency local Mushroom button
console failure Check the contact and connection
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus
MCC : EMERGENCY STOP
RM relay is off Emergency stop Check all emergency stop mushroom button
RM relay failure Check if the coil is supplied
Check relay switch
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
MCC : I/O MODULUS
FAULT
Ethernet I/O modulus I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
diagnostic connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
Circuit breaker tripped Check all circuit breaker which supply the
DC supply
MCC : INSULATION FAULT
Low insulation Low insulation Swicth off the MCC then Check the
insulation
Control relay failure Check the relay and connection
Insulation controller Check the led
failure

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 5 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

MCC : OFF
Communication between 690V Feeder Check the mcc is supplied
central control console and Network cable failure Check the Ethernet cable is connected
MCC is not established. (inside mcc) between the Ethernet switch and the
MCC is not supplied or Ethernet modulus.
Communication failure Check the cable
Ethernet switch failure Check the LED status on the Ethernet switch
(inside mcc) P: green, stand by: green, RM: off, fault: off
LNK: green, ACT orange flashing
Check the supply connection
Check the Ethernet connection
Ethernet I/O modulus Check the led
failure Check the supply connection
Check the Ethernet connection
DC supply failure Check the led status on the DC supply
Uout: green, Iout : green
if Uout is off and Iout is orange, remove the
short circuit on the DC circuit
If led is off check the AC supply
Circuit breaker tripped Check all circuit breaker which supply the
DC supply
690V/ 220 V Check the secondary voltage
transformer failure
MOTOR : OVERHEATING
Motor warning against the Motor overheat Wait refreshment of the motor, try again
overtemperature windings Thermistor failure Check resistance B1-B2 (value is near 400-
450 ohm), (detection range 300-800 ohm).

Thermistor relay failure Check RSD relay (normal position : green ;

fault : red error)
I/O modulus failure Check the plug, connections
Circuit is disconnected Check the connections, I/O modulus plug,
internal fuse of I/O modulus supply

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 6 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

MOTOR : LACK OF
CURRENT
The motor current is always Supply lines Check the 3 supply lines crossing the
checking when the motor is contactor motor with a clamp meter.
supplying. Threshold is 25A Motor failure Check connections, windings
for release the brake and Contactors failure Check the coil, connections.
after the threshold is 2A.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
T2 transformer failure Check the output 220V voltage.
Current transformer Check connections of TI (current
failure transformer). If necessary inverse with
another one to check.
CIN converter failure Check connections, polarity.
If necessary inverse with another one to
check.
Resistor terminals Check the value.
failure
MOTOR : OVERLOAD
Current is checking during Mechanical blocking Check leg freedom (guides, reducers,
jacking operations. If value is pinions) causing an overload inside the gear.
above 95 A, a fault appears.
At the same time, check on
screens if the concerned
pinion show an excessive
value.
Measure line Check connections of TI (current
transformer). If necessary inverse with
another one to check.
Supply lines Check the 3 supply lines crossing the
contactor motor with a clamp meter.
Motor failure Check connections, windings
Contactors failure Check the coil, connections.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
Current transformer Check connections of TI (current
failure transformer). If necessary inverse with
another one to check.
CIN converter failure Check connections, polarity.
If necessary inverse with another one to
check.
Resistor terminals Check the value.
failure

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 7 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

MOTOR : CIRCUIT
BREAKER
A fault appears when the Circuit breaker is Check the circuit breaker position and find
corresponding motor breaker tripped the short circuit
is tripped or off. Circuit breaker is Check the circuit breaker position
switched off
Auxiliary contact circuit This contact will be closed when the breaker
breaker is ON.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
PINION : LOAD > ABS
STORM VALUE
The load on the pinion is Overload on the pinion Use retorquing function for reduce the pinion
higher than the ABS storm load
load value Sensor failure Check the sensor signal
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
REDONDANCY NETWORK
FAULT
The ethernet fiber loop is One jacking equipment Check all equipment are supply
open. The jacking system is is OFF On the screen, network page displays the
always available. This failure equipment connected to the central control
can be repair later console
Ethernet switch failure Check the LED status on the Ethernet switch
(inside central control P: green, stand by: off, RM: green, fault: off
console) fiber port 1 LNK: green, ACT orange flashing
fiber port 2 LNK: green low flashing, ACT off
Check the supply connection
Check the Ethernet connection

Ethernet switch failure Check the LED status on the Ethernet switch
(inside mcc and PLC P: green, stand by: green, RM: off, fault: off
back up) LNK: green, ACT orange flashing
Check the supply connection
Check the Ethernet connection
Ethernet fiber Check the LED status on the Ethernet switch
(LNK : green )
Check the optic fiber Interchange the optic
fiber

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 8 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

RESISTOR BANK : WATER
OVERTEMPERATURE
(Optional equipment : air Water circuit failure Check the water inlet temperature ( <38°C )
resistor bank) Check the water flow (out of jacking system)
This equipment is additional Check the water cooling system ( out of
load for the generator power jacking system)
balance is positive. The
alarms protect the resistor
bank and jacking system is Sensor failure Check the sensor inside the resistor
always available The contact is open when the water
temperature is higher than 80°C
Check the sensor on the water outlet
The contact is open when the water
temperature is higher than 66°C
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
RESISTOR BANK : WATER
NO PRESSURE
(Optional equipment : air Water circuit failure Check the water flow (out of jacking system)
resistor bank)
This equipment is additional Sensor failure Check the sensor
load for the generator power The contact is closed when the pressure is
balance is positive. The higher than 2 bar
alarms protect the resistor I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
bank and jacking system is tripped the internal fuse.
always available
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
RESISTOR BANK : FAN
FAULT
(Optional equipment : air Resistor bank control Check the circuit breaker position
resistor bank) chest is off or tripped
This equipment is additional Fan grid is clogged Check and clean
load for the generator power
Sensor failure Check the sensor
balance is positive. The
( the contact is closed when the fan is
alarms protect the resistor
running)
bank and jacking system is
always available Fan motor failure Check the fan motor circuit breaker position
Check the motor
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 9 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

RESISTOR BANK:
OVERTEMPERATURE
(Optional equipment : air Fan grid is clogged Check and clean
resistor bank)
This equipment is additional
load for the generator power
balance is positive. The
alarms protect the resistor
bank and jacking system is Sensor failure Check the sensor
always available ( the contact is open when the temperature
is higher than the 90° )
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check connections, cables, plugs, coupling
connector. If necessary inverse with another
one to check.
SCREEN : Application has
halted due to:
Magelis CPU software Valid the message or switch off the magelis
failure CPU
Push on the green icon "Vigeo designer
runtime " for start the software
SCREEN : No reply from
PLC within time out period.
Failed to open connection
to PLC
The magelis CPU and PLC Ethernet switch failure Check led status on the Ethernet switch
CPU do not communicate RJ45 plugs: LNK green, ACT orange
flashing
Check Ethernet cable
PLC CPU failure
Check led status on PLC CPU
RUN green
TER orange flashed
Use reboot button (upper the TER plug)
Check the connections
Check all modules are plugged on the rack
ETY PORT failure
Check led status on PLC ETY PORT
RUN green
STS orange
RX and TX flashed
Check the Ethernet cable
Use reboot button (upper the TER plug)
Magelis CPU failure Check led status on the magelis CPU (PC1
PC2)
com1 RJ45 plug : led green and led orange
flashed
Check the Ethernet cable

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 10 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

SCREEN : No Signal
Screen do not receive the DC supply failure Check the led status on the DC supply
video signal from magelis Uout: green, Iout : green
CPU if Uout is off and Iout is orange, remove the
short circuit on the DC circuit
If led is off check the AC supply
Magelis CPU failure Check the led status on the magelis CPU (
PC1 PC2)
Power: green
disk: orange
Check the connections
SCREEN : Variable are
being logged to the storage
volume, which is now
either unvailable or full-
data logging
Secondary or optional
storage device is missing
or does not have enough
space. Run time opertions
that require this storage
device
Jacking system is always USB KEY
available. Check USB key is plugged
Data logging is disable Check USB key
STOP EXCESSIVE
INCLINATION
Rig inclination Check the rig inclination
Sensor failure Check the sensor
THERMAL RELAYS :
FAULT
PLC receive information from Contacts on thermal Check contacts coming from thermal relays
auxiliary thermal relays on relays RT3, RT4, RT5, RT6, RT7, RT8. This
retorquing contactors. It’s contact (97-98) is normally open and it will
impossible to retorque. be closed when the thermal relay is in
defect.
Thermal relay Wait for thermal relays refreshment and try
again a retorquing. If the contact stay
closed, replace the thermal relay.
I/O modulus Fuses Unplug the I/O supply modulus and check
tripped the internal fuse.
I/O modulus failure Check cables, plugs, between output
coupling connector and output modulus,
then check the output coupling connector
and the output modulus

E09-C150EF
18/04/2014
E09 VGA
Rev 01
TROUBLE SHOOTING 11 of 11

ALARMS & WARNINGS CAUSES CHECKING POINTS

WARNING EXCESSIVE
INCLINATION
Rig inclination Check the rig inclination
Sensor failure Check the sensor

E09-C150EF
E10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION N° 103299

STORAGE PROCEDURE

Appendixes : -
-

Diffusion : File
Date Visa Check Appr
Creation 11.06.05 FDE FRO FDE
Ind. Chapters and parameters updating
A UP-DATED §3 CONTENT 10.04.06 JMS DRO
B UP-DATED §3 CONTENT 9.03.07 JMS

Page 1 of 3
1. PURPOSE

The purpose of this specification is to describe the storage conditions required for BLM
machinery components and spare parts, after the delivery “ex works” from BLM, until the
installation onboard, final commissioning and delivery to the owner by the shipyard.
The fulfilment of those requirements is normally the shipyard responsibility.
The non respect of those recommendations may result in damages to the equipment, which
are not covered by the Hydralift BLM guarantee.

This specification is mainly applicable to the following equipment:

-Mooring winches and windlasses
-Cranes
-Jacking system
-Specialty winches
-Other equipment

NOTA: In all circumstances, it is very important to protect the

machinery against sand, dust, grits, and paints drops.

2. MECHANICAL PARTS

a. Parts protected by painting

Check, every two months, that there is no corrosion on parts protected by paint : corrosion
may be due to shocks during handling. If there is some corrosion, protection must be
immediately renewed.

b. External parts protected by grease

All the non painting parts are protected with grease (except brake rims for winches).

Check, every two months, that the protection by grease of external parts stays efficient
(clutch, external gear-trains, brake axles, brake screw, pinions). Renew greasing if
necessary.
Perform a complete greasing every two month of the machinery through the grease nipples.

c. Brakes
Brakes must be tightened to prevent corrosion of the brake rim.
Never grease the brake rims.

d. Gear boxes

Gear-trains inside the gear-box are protected against corrosion by “Corrosion inhibitor oil”
Total Protera or equal . Every 3 months, renew this protection by spraying “corrosion inhibitor
oil” inside the gearbox. Remove condensation water before spraying

e. Drum

Every two months, bushes must be greased and drums should be turned by hand on one
turn and a half

Page 2 of 3
3. ELECTRICAL PART

The equipments must be stored in a place according to the protection class (IP).

They are equipped with desiccant to avoid condensation and further rust on the electrical
connexions.

Motors, control stands

Space heaters, if any, must be connected as shown on instruction plate or book.

Alternatively, it is acceptable to check the desiccant bags every 3 months. These bags are
generally equipped with saturation indicators and can be regenerated by heating up.

Switchgear cabinets, consoles, rotoric resistances

This type of equipment is vacuum packed and it is recommended to not open the package
during storage before installation.
When the package is open the space heaters must be connected and energized.

4. HYDRAULIC PARTS

Flexible hoses must be protected against sunlight.

Fittings, valves, screws … must be protected from rust by grease impregnated wrapping
bands. Metallic parts non protected by paint must be greased.

5. DIESEL ENGINES

The original engine manufacturer’s recommendations to be applied

It is essential to protect the engine from corrosion, dust, and freeze.

Page 3 of 3
E11
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 1 of 34

SUMMARY

1. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLER 3

1.1. PRESENTATION 3
1.1.1. Power supply 3
1.1.2. Processor 4
1.1.3. PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory 4
1.2. APPLICATION PROGRAM 5

2. MAGELIS SMART BOX 6

2.1. PRESENTATION 6
2.2. APPLICATION PROGRAM 7

3. SCREEN 8

3.1. PRESENTATION 8
3.2. APPLICATION PROGRAM 10
3.3. SETTINGS 10
3.3.1. HMI Offline 10
3.3.2. Unlock memory 10
3.3.3. Touch screen calibration 12
3.3.4. Screen resolution 14
3.3.5. Date & Time 17
3.3.6. Lock memory 19
3.4. MAINTENANCE (REGULAR CLEANING) 20
3.4.1. Precautions 20
3.4.2. Cleaning the Screen 22

4. ETHERNET SWITCH 23

4.1. WEB BASED INTERFACE 23

4.2. IP ADDRESS SETTING 25
4.3. WEB-BASED IP CONFIGURATION 26
4.4. SAVING SETTINGS 28
4.5. JACKING SYSTEM ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS 28

5. ETHERNET MODBUS TCP/IP NETWORK INTERFACE MODULUS 30

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 2 of 34

5.1. PRESENTATION 30
5.2. ROTARY SWITCHES 31
5.3. LED INDICATORS 32
5.4. SETTINGS 34
5.4.1. IP address 34
5.4.2. Island Configuration 34

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 3 of 34

1. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLER

1.1. Presentation

1.1.1. Power supply

Power supply module is comprised of:

1 Display block comprising:
o OK lamp (green), on if voltages are present and correct.
o BAT lamp (red), on if the battery is inoperative or missing.
o 24 V lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present (according to model).
2 RESET pencil-point pushbutton causing a warm restart of the application.
3 Slot for a battery that protects the internal RAM memory of the processor.
4 Cover to protect the front panel of the module.
5 Screw terminal for connecting:
o To mains supply.
o The alarm relay contact.
o The sensor power supply for a.c. supplies (according to model).
6 Opening for cable clamp.
7 Fuse located beneath the module and protecting primary voltage.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 4 of 34

1.1.2. Processor

1 A display block with 5 LEDs:

o RUN LED (green): Processor in operation (program running)
o ERR LED (red): Controller detected fault on the processor or its on-board devices
(PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card)
o I/O LED (red): Controller detected fault occurring on another station module or
configuration fault
o TER LED (yellow): Activity on the terminal port
o FIP LED (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus
2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 LEDs:
o RUN LED (green): Ethernet port ready
o ERR LED (red): Ethernet port inoperative
o COL LED (red): Collision detection
o STS LED (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics
o Two TX and RX LEDs (yellow): Transmission/reception activity
3 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated
4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or
adjustment terminal
5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral device
6 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network
7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card
8 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a communication card or 4 Mb SRAM memory extension card for
storing additional data
9 A 9-way SUB-D connector for Fipio bus manager communication

1.1.3. PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory

PCMCIA memory extension card is used to extend the internal EPROM capacity of PLC
processors. This card is designed to storage the application program without supply.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 5 of 34

1.2. Application program

The Jacking system is supported by the main PLC which located in the central control
console.
In case of main PLC failure or emergency operation only, the redundant PLC can be
activated with the key switch on the central control console. This redundant PLC or back up
PLC is fitted on the PLC Back Up control chest.
When you use this redundant PLC, the height settings and load are loose and when you
return to main PLC the height values must be adjusted.
The main PLC and backup PLC have the same application program. It is storage in the
PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory on each processor.

When the processor is changed, remove the PCMCIA Flash EPROM and installed it in the
new processor.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 6 of 34

2. MAGELIS SMART BOX

2.1. Presentation

1 Add-on UPS slot

2 Add-on interface slot
3 MIC, Line IN/Line OUT
4 Supply voltage 24 Vdc
5 COM2
6 COM1
7 Monitor/Panel, DVI-I
8 ETH1 (10/100/1000 MBit)
9 ETH2 (10/100/1000 MBit)
10 USB2, USB4 (max 500mA)
11 USB1, USB3 (max 1A)
12 Warning sign/Heat sink seal
13 Heat sink
14 PCI slot (half-size)/PCI or PCIe

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 7 of 34

1 Status LEDs
2 Permanent magnet
3 Fan kit cover
4 Serial number sticker
5 CompactFlash slot CF1/Connection via IDE-PATA
6 Slide-in compact slot
7 Front USB (USB5 max. 1A)
8 Battery
9 Power/Reset button
10 CMOS Profile switch
NOTE: The front USB is a diagnostic interface for service and maintenance.

2.2. Application program

Human Machine interface application program is storage on the main disk of magelis smart
box.
Each magelis smart box has a dedicated application program. The spare part must be setting
with a dedicated application program by NOV-BLM.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 8 of 34

3. SCREEN

3.1. Presentation
The following provides a front view of the iDisplay:

Part Function
A Display: displays User created screens
B Touch Panel: performs screen change operations and sends data to the host (PC).
C Front LED: indicates the condition of the power supply, a backlight burnout or image
signal input.
D Front USB Connector (Type A): connects USB devices.

The following provides rear and bottom views of the iDisplay:

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 9 of 34

Part Function
E AC Power Connector: provides the input and ground terminals for a power
cable.
F Setting Switch (Dip switch): changes the settings of each operation mode.
G VGA Interface (analog RGB) Connector: connects analog RGB interface.
H DVI-D Interface Connector: connects DVI-D interface.
I RS-232C Connector: connects RS-232C (serial) interface, sends touch panel
data to the host (PC), and receives commands from the host (PC).
J USB Connector (Type B): connects USB interface, sends touch panel data to
the host (PC, and receives commands from the host (PC) or can be used as
an upstream port for USB-HUB.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 10 of 34

3.2. Application program

The touch screen is only a display. It does not have application program.

3.3. Settings

The screen settings require to exit HMI runtime for return to WinXPe and to unlock memory.

3.3.1. HMI Offline

On the left top touch screen corner, the button closes the HMI runtime. If the touch screen
function has trouble, the USB MOUSE shall be plug for click on the button.

The HMI runtime is closed and the WinXPe office is displayed. If the memory is lock, all
actions with WinXPe are not storage. The memory status is displayed on the bottom.
The memory is lock, if EWF have not red cross

The memory is unlock, if EWF have a red cross

3.3.2. Unlock memory

Open Vijeo Designer Runtime Manager

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 11 of 34

Then unlock the memory

Then valid

Then the system reboot

Check the memory status is unlock

The screen setting is available.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 12 of 34

3.3.3. Touch screen calibration

Open the Control Panel

Open the Pointer Devices

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 13 of 34

Select 9 points for Calibration Points

Then click Calibrate

Touch the arrow tips

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 14 of 34

Validate the touch screen calibration

3.3.4. Screen resolution

Open control panel

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 15 of 34

Open Display

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 16 of 34

Select the screen settings and validate

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 17 of 34

3.3.5. Date & Time

Open control panel

Open Date and Time

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 18 of 34

Select GMT time zone and do not tick “Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving
changes”

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 19 of 34

3.3.6. Lock memory

For lock the memory, open Vijeo Designer Runtime

Then Click Lock

The HMI reboot and start.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 20 of 34

3.4. Maintenance (Regular Cleaning)

3.4.1. Precautions

DANGER CHEMICAL BURNS TO EYES OR SKIN

• Do not use tools to operate the touch panel or in the vicinity of the display.
• When placing the display face-down, select a clean, level, non-abrasive surface. If
necessary, place a soft, non-abrasive pad on the surface before lowering the unit.
• If a leak in the LCD panel is discovered and you come in contact with the liquid crystal
material, follow theses procedures:
• In the case of contact with eyes or mouth, flush with running water for 15 minutes
minimum.
• In the case of contact with skin or clothing, wipe off the liquid crystal material and wash
with soap and running water for 15 minutes minimum.
• If liquid crystal is ingested, induce vomiting, rinse mouth, and then drink a large
quantity of water.
• Follow any other hazardous substances safety procedures required by your facility.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury

CAUTIONS HARMFUL CLEANING SOLUTIONS

• Do not clean the unit or any component of the unit with paint thinner, organic
solvents, or strong acids.
• Use only a mild soap or detergent that will not harm the polycarbonate material of the
screen.
• Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

Ensure that the gasket is in good working order and free from cracks, scratches, and dirt. A
gasket that has been used for a long period of time may be scratched or dirty, and may have
lost much of its water resistance. Change the gasket at least once a year, or when scratches
or dirt become visible.

CAUTIONS LOSS OF SEAL

• Inspect the installation gasket prior to installation or reinstallation, and periodically as

required by your operating environment.
• Replace the gasket if visible scratches, tears, dirt, or excessive wear are noted during
inspection.
• Do not stretch the gasket unnecessarily or allow the gasket to contact the corners or
edges of the frame.
• Ensure that the gasket is fully seated in the installation groove.
• Install the iDisplay into a panel that is flat and free of scratches or dents.
• Tighten the installation fasteners using a torque of 0.5 N•m (4.5 lb-in).

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 21 of 34

DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH

• Remove all power from the device before removing any covers or elements of the
system, and prior to installing or removing any accessories, hardware, or cables.
• Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm power is off.
• Unplug the power cable from both the iDisplay and the power supply.
• Replace and secure all covers or elements of the system before applying power to the
unit.
• Use only the specified voltage when operating the iDisplay 19". This device is
designed to use 100...240 Vac input.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 22 of 34

3.4.2. Cleaning the Screen

The following table explains how to clean the screen:

Display How to clean

When the display surface or frame becomes dirty,
use a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent to
wipe away any dust or stains.

Do not clean the unit with thinner, organic solvents,

or strong acids.

Do not use sharp or hard objects, such as a

mechanical pencil or screwdriver, to push on the
display. This could damage the unit.

Attach the screen protection sheet when using the

iDisplay in extremely dirty or dusty areas.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 23 of 34

4. ETHERNET SWITCH

4.1. Web based Interface

The user-friendly Web-based interface gives you the option of operating the device from any
location in the network via a standard browser such as Mozilla Firefox or Microsoft Internet
Explorer.
As a universal access tool, the Web browser uses an applet which communicates with the
device via the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The Web-based interface allows you to graphically configure the device.

To open the Web-based interface, you need a Web browser (a program that can read
hypertext), for example Mozilla Firefox version 1 or later, or Microsoft Internet Explorer version
6 or later.

Note: The Web-based interface uses Java software 6 (“Java™ Runtime Environment Version
1.6.x”).

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 24 of 34

Start your Web browser.

Make sure that you have activated JavaScript and Java in the security settings of
your browser.
Establish the connection by entering the IP address of the device which you want
to administer via the Web-based management in the address field of the Web
browser. Enter the address in the following
form:
[Link]

The login window appears on the screen.

Select the desired language.

In the drop-down menu, you select
– user, to have read access, or
– admin, to have read and write access to
the device.
The password "public", with which you have read access, appears in

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 25 of 34

the password field. If you wish to have write access to the device, then highlight the
contents of the password field and overwrite it with the
password "private" (default setting).
Click on OK.

The website of the device appears on the screen.

Note: The changes you make in the dialogs are copied to the device when you click "Set".
Click "Reload" to update the display.

Note: If you enter an incorrect configuration, you may block the access to your device.
Activating the function "Cancel configuration change" in the "Load/Save"
dialog enables you to return automatically to the last configuration after a set time period has
elapsed. This gives you back your access to the
device.

4.2. IP address setting

The Ethernet Switch Configurator Software protocol enables you to assign IP
parameters to the device via the Ethernet.
You can easily configure other parameters via the Web-based interface (see the "Web-based
Interface" reference manual).

Install the Ethernet Switch Configurator Software software on your PC. The software is on the
CD supplied with the device.

To install it, you start the installation program on the CD.

Start the program Ethernet Switch Configurator Software.

When Ethernet Switch Configurator Software is started, it automatically searches the network
for devices that support the Ethernet Switch Configurator Software protocol.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 26 of 34

Ethernet Switch Configurator Software uses the first network interface found on your PC. If
your computer has more than 1 network interface, you may select a different network interface
from the pull down list on Ethernet Switch
Configurator Software‘s toolbar.

Ethernet Switch Configurator Software displays a line for every device which responds to the
Ethernet Switch Configurator Software protocol.

Ethernet Switch Configurator Software enables you to identify the devices displayed.
Select a device line.
Click on the signal symbol in the tool bar to set the LEDs for the selected device
flashing. To switch off the flashing, click on the symbol again.

By double-clicking a line, you open a window in which you can enter the device name
and the IP parameters.

Note: When the IP address is entered, the device copies the local configuration settings (see
“saving settings”).

Note: For security reasons, switch off the Ethernet Switch Configurator Software function for
the device in the Web-based interface, after you have assigned the IP parameters to the
device (see “Web-based IP Configuration”).

Note: Save the settings so that you will still have the entries after a restart
(see “saving settings”).

4.3. Web-based IP configuration

With the Basic Settings:Network dialog you define the source from which the device
gets its IP parameters after starting, and you assign the IP parameters and VLAN ID and
configure the Ethernet Switch Configurator Protocol access.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 27 of 34

Under “Mode”, you enter where the device gets its IP parameters:
In the BOOTP mode, the configuration is via a BOOTP or DHCP
server on the basis of the MAC address of the device.
In the DHCP mode, the configuration is via a DHCP server on the basis of the
MAC address or the name of the device.
In the “local” mode the net parameters in the device memory are used.

Note: When you change the mode of the IP address, the device activates the new mode
immediately after the “Set” button is pressed.

Enter the parameters on the right according to the selected mode.

You enter the name applicable to the DHCP protocol in the “Name” line in the system
dialog of the Web-based interface.

The Ethernet Switch Configurator Software protocol allows you to allocate an IP address
to the device on the basis of its MAC address. Activate the Ethernet Switch Configurator
Software protocol if you want to allocate an IP address to the device from your PC with
the enclosed Ethernet Switch Configurator Software software (state on delivery:
operation “on”, access “read-write”).

Note: Save the settings so that you will still have the entries after a restart
(see “saving settings”).

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 28 of 34

4.4. Saving settings

The device saves settings such as the IP parameters and the port configuration in the
temporary memory. These settings are lost when you switch off or reboot the device.
The device enables you to

load settings from a non-volatile memory into the temporary memory

save settings from the temporary memory in a non-volatile memory.

If you change the current configuration (for example, by switching a port off), the Web-based
interface changes the “load/save” symbol in the navigation tree from a disk symbol to a
yellow triangle. After saving the configuration, the Web-based interface displays the
“load/save” symbol as a disk again.

Saving Locally

The device allows you to save the current configuration data in the local non- volatile memory
and the EAM.

Select the
Basics: Load/Save dialog.
In the “Save” frame, click “to Device”.
Click on “Save”.

The device saves the current configuration data in the local non- volatile memory and, if an
EAM is connected, also in the EAM

4.5. Jacking system Ethernet switch settings

Each Ethernet switch has individual IP address. Network address tag is fixed inside each
MCC and Central control Console

The Ethernet switches inside MCC and PLC Back up Chest use the default settings.

The Ethernet switch inside the central control console requires adjusting the default settings.
This device must be detected the ring redundancy failure.
This function is on Diagnostics/ Device Status

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 29 of 34

Ring Redundancy must be monitor

After to change this function the settings must be saved (see “saving settings”).

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 30 of 34

5. ETHERNET MODBUS TCP/IP NETWORK INTERFACE MODULUS

5.1. Presentation

The physical features of the STB NIP 2212 are described briefly in the following table:
Feature Function
1 Ethernet interface An RJ-45 connector is used to connect the NIM and the island bus to an
Ethernet LAN network.
2 MAC ID 48-bit, unique network ID hard-coded in the STB NIP 2212 when
manufactured.
3 upper rotary switch The rotary switches used together specify a role name for the
STB NIP 2212.
4 lower rotary switch
Alternatively, the lower rotary switch can be used to direct the STB NIP 2212 to
use its MAC-based default IP address or to obtain its
IP parameters from a BootP server or from the STB NIP 2212 web site.

5 space provided to record Write the IP address that you assign to this STB NIP 2212 here.
IP address
6 power supply interface A two-pin connector used to connect an external 24 VDC power supply
to the NIM.
7 LED array Colored LEDs use various patterns to visually indicate the operational status
of the island bus, activity on the NIM, and the status of communications to the
island over the Ethernet LAN.
8 removable memory card A plastic drawer in which a removable memory card can be seated and then
drawer inserted into the NIM.
9 CFG port cover A hinged flap on the NIM’s front panel that covers the CFG interface
and the RST button.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 31 of 34

5.2. Rotary Switches

The STB NIP 2212 is a single node on an Ethernet LAN and, in turn, the Internet. An
STB NIP 2212 must have a unique IP address. The two rotary switches on the NIM provide a
simple, easy way to assign an IP address to the STB NIP 2212.

The two rotary switches are positioned one above the other on the front of the STB NIP 2212.
The upper switch represents the tens digit, and the lower switch represents the ones digit:

Each rotary switch position that you can use to set a valid IP address is marked on the
STB NIP 2212 housing.

The rotary switches are used for select the role name numeric value ( 00 to 159).
On the upper switch (tens digit), the available settings are 0 to 15.
On the lower switch (ones digit), the available settings are 0 to 9.
The numeric setting is appended to the STB NIP 2212 part number, e.g., STBNIP2212_123,
and a DHCP server assigns it an IP address.

NOTE: The STB NIP 2212 requires a valid IP address to communicate on the Ethernet
network and with a host. You must power cycle the STB NIP 2212 to configure the STB NIP
2212 with an IP address set with these rotary switches.

NOTE: Do not change the rotary switch settings except when you are installing or configuring
the NIM. If you change the switch settings at any other time, you will lose Ethernet
communications with the island.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 32 of 34

5.3. LED Indicators

Six LEDs on the STB NIP 2212 NIM visually indicate the operational status of the island bus on
an Ethernet LAN. The LED array is located toward the top of the NIM front bezel:
o 10T ACT : indicates whether the Ethernet LAN and the Ethernet port are healthy and
alive.
o LAN ST : indicates events on the Ethernet LAN.
o LEDs RUN, PWR, ERR, and TEST indicate activity on the island and/or events on the
NIM.

The illustration shows the six LEDs used by the Advantys STB NIP 2212:

The 10T ACT and the STATUS indicate the conditions described in the following table:
Label Pattern Meaning
on or blinking The network is alive and healthy.
10T ACT (green)
off The network is not alive and not healthy.
steady on The Ethernet LAN is operational.
steady off No MAC address found.
blinking Initializing the Ethernet network.
blink: 3 No link pulse detected.
LAN ST (green) blink: 4 Duplicate IP address detected.
blink: 5 Obtaining IP address or using default IP address for bootp/Role name
switch setting .
blink: 6 Using the default IP address.

The following table describes:

o The island bus condition(s) communicated by the LEDs
o The colors and blink patterns used to indicate each condition
As you refer to the table, keep in mind the following:
o It is assumed that the PWR LED is on continuously, indicating that the NIM is
receiving adequate power. If the PWR LED is off, logic power to the NIM is off or
insufficient.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 33 of 34

o Individual blinks are approximately 200 ms. There is a 1-second interval between blink
sequences. Please note:
o blinking: blinks steadily, alternating between 200 ms on and 200 ms off.
o blink 1: blinks once (200 ms), then 1 second off.
o blink 2: blinks twice (200 ms on, 200 ms off, 200 ms on), then 1 second off.
o blink N: blinks N (some number of) times, then 1 second off.
o If the TEST LED is on, either the Advantys configuration software or an HMI
panel is the master of the island bus. If the TEST LED is off, the fieldbus
master has control of the island bus.

The RUN, ERR and TEST indicate the conditions described in the following table:

RUN (green) ERR (red) TEST (yellow) Meaning

blink: 2 blink: 2 blink: 2 The island is powering up (self test in progress).
off off off The island is initializing. The island is not started.
blink: 1 off off The island has been put in the pre-operational state by
the RST button. The island is not started.
blink: 3 The NIM is reading from the removable memory card
on The NIM is overwriting its Flash memory with the card’s
configuration data. (See note 1.)
off blink: 8 off The contents of the removable memory card are invalid.
blinking (steady) off off The NIM is configuring or auto-configuring the island
bus. The island bus is not started.

blinking off on Auto-configuration data is being written to Flash memory.

(See note 1.)
blink: 3 blink: 2 off Configuration mismatch detected after power up. At least
one mandatory module does not match. The island bus is
not started.
off blink: 2 off The NIM has detected a module assignment error; the
island bus is not started.
blink: 5 invalid internal triggering protocol
off blink: 6 off The NIM detects no I/O modules on the island bus.
blinking off The NIM detects no I/O modules on the island bus ... or ...
(steady) No further communications with the NIM are possible.
Probable causes:
internal condition
wrong module ID
device did not auto-address
mandatory module is incorrectly configured
process image is not valid
device is incorrectly configured
The NIM has detected an anomaly on the island bus.
receive/transmit queue software overrun

on off off The island bus is operational.

on blink 3 off At least one standard module does not match. The island
bus is operational with a configuration mismatch.

E11-C150EF
05/05/2014
E11 VGA
Rev 01
AUTOMATION 34 of 34

on blink: 2 off There is a serious configuration mismatch (when a

module is pulled from a running island). The island bus is
now in pre-operational mode because of one or more
mismatched mandatory modules.
blink: 4 off off The island bus is stopped (when a module is pulled from
a running island). No further communications with the
island are possible.
off on off Internal condition: The NIM is inoperable.
[any] [any] on Test mode is enabled: The configuration software or an
HMI panel can set outputs. (See note2.)

1 The TEST LED is on temporarily during the Flash overwrite process.

2 The TEST LED is on steadily while the device connected to the CFG port is in control.

5.4. Settings

5.4.1. IP address

Select with the rotary switches number of island written on the electrical drawing.
The IP address of Island is assigned by the PLC

NOTE: the setting is done if the NIM is reboot and Ethernet communication with PLC is
available

5.4.2. Island Configuration

All I/O modulus of island shall be plugged on the rack.

Then push the RST button for 2 seconds or longer for set the island configuration

NOTE: Pressing the RST button does not affect network settings.

E11-C150EF
E12
11/07/2014
E12 VGA
Rev 01
RESISTOR BANK MAINTENANCE 1 of 2

Preliminary note: do not proceed to any operation on the immersion heater if it is

energized (power and control). Be sure that electric supply has been cut off upstream.

- If the heating bundle must be removed, make sure that its maximal temperature does not
exceed 50 °c
- Every maintenance operation must be done by competent and qualified people
- Depending on maintenance operation, de-pressurize the circuit on which the heater is fitted
and drain-off the circuit

1. Regularly check the good state of the electrical connections (cleanliness,

tightening ).

2. Check the efficiency of the sealing gasket(s) and proceed to replacement if

necessary.

3. After re-mounting, check the efficiency of the gasket(s).

4. Regularly check the good state of the heating elements of the immersion heaters
(particularly check that no deposit remains in contact with the heating elements).

5. If the equipment is submitted to specific regulations refer to the concerned regulation

for visits and tests.

6. In case of long period of stopping, place a desiccator inside of the terminal enclosure
(do not forget to remove if before starting up).

7. Check regularly that all other safety devices protecting the equipment.(temperature,
low pressure ... ) are correctly working. After checking, make sure that setting is
identical to initial setting.

8. Limitation and monitoring pressure devices must be maintained and checked

regularly in compliance with regulations in force or manufacturer instructions
whichever is the most stringent.

9. Some immersion heaters or heaters are equipped with non-connected spare heating
elements.

E12-C150EF
11/07/2014
E12 VGA
Rev 01
RESISTOR BANK MAINTENANCE 2 of 2

10. Specific maintenance procedure (for heater equipped with spare element)

To replace a heating element, proceed as follows (after checking that maximal

temperature of equipment does not exceed 50 °C):

- open the top cover

- disconnect the feeding cables
-look for the defective heating element(s) with an ohmmeter
- connect the new heating element(s) (check that the cabling is strictly the
same than the original one)
- reconnect all cables
-close the top cover (check that the sealing gasket is efficient)

11. Repeated opening and closing of enclosures may damage the gasket (if supplied)
and therefore may invalidate the tightness of the enclosure.
In this case, replace the gasket by a strictly identical one.

E12-C150EF
PART F
Document
SPARE PARTS

• Commissioning spare parts F01

10724061

• One year spare parts F02

10724062

• Recommended spare parts list F03

10891534

• Order spare parts F04

G317

ABR – 11/06/14 – Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-F

F01
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724061-001 Rev.01 RECHANGES MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS F01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 CANTINE 10068754-001 SPARE PARTS & TOOLS BOX
1 ROULEMENT 10030612-001 BEARING
1 ROULEMENT 10030618-001 BEARING
1 DISQUE MINCE GARNI 10038408-001 THIN BRAKE DISC WITH LININGS
6 FREIN ECROU 10046884-001 LOCKING PLATE
12 RONDELLE PRESSION 10029538-001 WASHER SPRING
12 VIS H 10029788-001 SCREW H
1 CORPS DE VOYANT 10096089-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT
1 BOBINE 10096635-001 COIL
1 CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES 10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
1 RELAIS 10096729-001 CONTROL RELAY
1 RELAIS 10096739-001 CONTROL RELAY
1 RELAIS 10096830-001 CONTROL RELAY
10 FUSIBLE 10097050-001 FUSE
5 LAMPE 10097202-001 BULB
5 LAMPE 10097203-001 BULB
5 LAMPE 10097204-001 BULB
1 CLE DE SERRAGE 10097205-001 MOUNTING TOOL
1 TIRE LAMPE + LENTILLE 10097206-001 LAMP SERVICE TOOL
1 CONTACT NF 10097223-001 CONTACT NC
1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097231-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097238-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097264-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097273-001 HEAD BUTTONS

Page 1 / 3
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724061-001 Rev.01 RECHANGES MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS F01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097280-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097281-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097283-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097286-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 CORPS DE VOYANT 10097287-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT
1 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097288-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
1 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097289-001 BODY FOR LIGHTNG. PUSH BUTTON
1 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097294-001 BODY FOR LIGHTNG. PUSH BUTTON
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097302-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097303-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097523-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097524-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097526-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097527-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097528-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097530-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 DISJONCTEUR 10097531-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
1 VOYANT ROUGE A LED 10097549-001 LED RED PILOT LIGHT
1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097552-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097869-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 RELAIS 10097910-001 CONTROL RELAY
1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097913-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 ALIMENTATION 10097923-001 POWER SUPPLY

Page 2 / 3
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724061-001 Rev.01 RECHANGES MISE EN SERVICE COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS F01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097937-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 COMMUTATEUR 10110359-001 SELECTOR SWITCH
1 BOBINE 10114001-001 COIL
1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE DISJONCTEUR 10724634-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
1 DISJONCTEUR 10724644-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
10 FUSIBLE 10725201-001 FUSE
10 FUSIBLE 10725203-001 FUSE

Page 3 / 3
F02
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724062-001 Rev.02 RECHANGES 1 AN ONE YEAR SPARE PARTS F02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

2 ROULEMENT 10030612-001 BEARING
2 ROULEMENT 10030618-001 BEARING
2 DISQUE MINCE GARNI 10038408-001 THIN BRAKE DISC WITH LININGS
12 FREIN ECROU 10046884-001 LOCKING PLATE
24 RONDELLE PRESSION 10029538-001 WASHER SPRING
24 VIS H 10029788-001 SCREW H
2 CORPS DE VOYANT 10096089-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT
2 BOBINE 10096635-001 COIL
2 CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES 10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
2 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
2 RELAIS 10096729-001 CONTROL RELAY
2 RELAIS 10096739-001 CONTROL RELAY
2 RELAIS 10096830-001 CONTROL RELAY
20 FUSIBLE 10097050-001 FUSE
10 LAMPE 10097202-001 BULB
10 LAMPE 10097203-001 BULB
10 LAMPE 10097204-001 BULB
2 CONTACT NF 10097223-001 CONTACT NC
2 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097231-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097238-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097264-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097273-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097280-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097281-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097283-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097286-001 HEAD BUTTONS

Page 1 / 4
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724062-001 Rev.02 RECHANGES 1 AN ONE YEAR SPARE PARTS F02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

2 CORPS DE VOYANT 10097287-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT
2 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097288-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
2 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097289-001 BODY FOR LIGHTNG. PUSH BUTTON
2 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097294-001 BODY FOR LIGHTNG. PUSH BUTTON
2 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097302-001 HEAD BUTTONS
2 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097303-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097523-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097524-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097526-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097527-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097528-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097530-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISJONCTEUR 10097531-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
2 VOYANT ROUGE A LED 10097549-001 LED RED PILOT LIGHT
2 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097552-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
2 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
2 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097869-001 POWER CONTACTOR
2 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
2 RELAIS 10097910-001 CONTROL RELAY
2 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097913-001 POWER CONTACTOR
2 ALIMENTATION 10097923-001 POWER SUPPLY
2 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097937-001 POWER CONTACTOR
2 COMMUTATEUR 10110359-001 SELECTOR SWITCH
2 BOBINE 10114001-001 COIL
2 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
2 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE DISJONCTEUR 10724634-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT

Page 2 / 4
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724062-001 Rev.02 RECHANGES 1 AN ONE YEAR SPARE PARTS F02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

2 DISJONCTEUR 10724644-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
20 FUSIBLE 10725201-001 FUSE
20 FUSIBLE 10725203-001 FUSE
1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096372-001 CONVERTER
1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
1 EMBASE SORTIE 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
1 ALIMENTATION AUTOMATE 10096489-001 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER SUPPLY
1 TERMINAISON DE LIGNE 10096496-001 LINE PLUG
1 CORDON 10096550-001 NETWORK CABLE
1 CORDON 10096551-001 NETWORK CABLE
1 CORDON 10096555-001 NETWORK CABLE
1 ROUTEUR 10096578-001 SWITCH
1 ROUTEUR 10096579-001 SWITCH
1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10096668-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
1 LENTILLE BOUTON ROUGE 10097284-001 RED FLAT LENSE
1 LENTILLE VOYANT ROUGE 10097285-001 RED FLAT LENSE
1 LENTILLE BOUTON BLANC 10097290-001 WHITE FLAT LENSE
1 INCLINOMETRE 10097334-001 INCLINOMETER
1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
1 AVERTISSEUR SONORE 10097589-001 SOUND ALARM
1 ALIMENTATION 10097922-001 POWER SUPPLY
1 ALIMENTATION 10097923-001 POWER SUPPLY
1 EMBASE RELAIS 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
1 TRANSFORMATEUR TENSION 10098294-001 TRANSFORMER

Page 3 / 4
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724062-001 Rev.02 RECHANGES 1 AN ONE YEAR SPARE PARTS F02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 TERMINAL DE DIALOGUE 10109185-001 DIALOGUE CONSOLE
1 RACK EXTENSIBLE 10109189-001 EXTENSIBLE BASE
1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10110187-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 MODULE ETHERNET MODBUS 10549296-001 ETHERNET MODBUS MODULUS
1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
1 MODULE 10549305-001 MODULUS
1 MODULE 10549308-001 MODULUS
1 CONNECTEUR 10549319-001 CONNECTOR
1 MODULE 10549491-001 MODULUS
1 MODULE 10549494-001 MODULUS
1 PROCESSEUR AUTOMATE 10549518-001 PLC COMPUTER
1 APPAREIL DE REINITIALISATION ELECTRIQUE 10668026-001 ELECTRICAL REMOTE TRIPPING
1 ALIMENTATION 10709479-001 SUPPLY
1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10724647-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 ALIMENTATION AUXILIAIRE 10724658-001 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
1 CONVERTISSEUR SONDE 10683391-001 SENSOR ADAPTER
1 MAGELIS UNITE CENTRALE + LOGICIEL 10702449-001 MAGELIS CPU + SOFTWARE

Page 4 / 4
F03
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
MANUFACTURER/SELLER MAIN EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION REV 02
NOV - BLM Contact : Spare Parts Department JU2000E Date 11/07/2014
15, rue de la Métallurgie Phone / Fax : +[Link].36.00 / +[Link].37.37 MATERIAL JACKING EQUIPMENT
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX - France [Link] : BLM@[Link] TYPE C150EF
CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER N° MAIN EQUIPMENT NOV PROJECT N° MAIN PROJECT DESIGNATION NOV PROPOSAL
SHIPYARD - QUOTE N° -
HULL N° - VALIDITY 11/07/2015
RIG NAME -
PART IDENTIFICATION SPARE PARTS PROPOSAL COMPANY USE

Recommended quantity of spare

OVER 5 YEARS
parts

Crittical parts

REQUESTED

REQUESTED
1-5 YEARS
QUANTITY

QUANTITY
TOTAL

Minimum stock

Over 5 years
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION OF PART DRAWING NUMBER POSITION QUANTITY

spare parts

spare parts
operational

operational
1-5 years
INSTALLED

UNIT PRICE IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
EURO

10724041-001 GEAR UNIT - ARRGT B - WITH PLMS 10724407 G01 27 350 154,20
10724042-001 GEAR UNIT - ARRGT A - WITH PLMS 10724408 G02 27 350 154,20
10723807-001 GEAR UNIT - ARRGT B - WITHOUT PLMS 10724407 G01* 27 339 672,95
10723808-001 GEAR UNIT - ARRGT A - WITHOUT PLMS 10724408 G02* 27 339 672,95
10030825-001 10724407 N10-1 27 1 53 344,38
ELECTRIC MOTOR
10030826-001 10724408 N10-1 27 1 53 344,38
10029198-001 CIRCLIP 41003118 N10-1 / N10-5 54 1 1 9,21

10030618-001 BEARING 41003118 N10-1 / N20-31 54 1 2 2 157,09

10034041-001 RING FOR GASKET 41003118 N10-1 / N20-32 54 1 1 111,55
10030612-001 BEARING 41003118 N10-1 / N20-35 54 1 2 2 74,71

10036293-001 BRAKE ASSEMBLY F20 41003118 N10-1 / N30 54 3 9 044,75

10038947-001 FRAME COILED F20 41003118 N10-1 / N30-50 54 1 3 4 994,66
10102411-001 VIS H - M12 50/30 41003118 N10-1 / N30-51 324 12 36 0,70
10037042-001 PLATE ARMATURE F20 41003118 N10 / N30-55 54 1 3 823,41
10038841-001 DISK ASSEMBLY F20 41003118 N10-1 / N30-56 54 1 3 1 881,70
10038408-001 DISC WITH LININGS F20 41003118 N10-1 / N30-56-2 54 1 2 6 631,71
10046884-001 DOUBLE TAB LOCK 41003118 N10-1 / N30-56-4 324 6 9 27 0,75
10029788-001 SCREW H - M8 25/25 41003118 N10-1 / N30-56-5 648 12 12 36 0,54
10029538-001 WASHER SPRING 41003118 N10-1 / N30-56-6 648 12 12 36 1,26
10029788-001 SCREW H - M8 25/25 41003118 N10-1 / N30-56-9 270 12 12 36 0,54
10038564-001 HUB SPLINED BRAKE F20 41003118 N10-1 / N30-57 54 1 3 418,10
10037405-001 COVER MAGNETIC BRAKE 41003118 N10-1 / N30-60 54 1 3 1 405,22

10891534-SPL Rev.02 NOV-BLM Page 1 de 13

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
MANUFACTURER/SELLER MAIN EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION REV 02
NOV - BLM Contact : Spare Parts Department JU2000E Date 11/07/2014
15, rue de la Métallurgie Phone / Fax : +[Link].36.00 / +[Link].37.37 MATERIAL JACKING EQUIPMENT
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX - France [Link] : BLM@[Link] TYPE C150EF
CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER N° MAIN EQUIPMENT NOV PROJECT N° MAIN PROJECT DESIGNATION NOV PROPOSAL
SHIPYARD - QUOTE N° -
HULL N° - VALIDITY 11/07/2015
RIG NAME -
PART IDENTIFICATION SPARE PARTS PROPOSAL COMPANY USE

Recommended quantity of spare

OVER 5 YEARS
parts

Crittical parts

REQUESTED

REQUESTED
1-5 YEARS
QUANTITY

QUANTITY
TOTAL

Minimum stock

Over 5 years
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION OF PART DRAWING NUMBER POSITION QUANTITY

spare parts

spare parts
operational

operational
1-5 years
INSTALLED

UNIT PRICE IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
EURO
10037972-001 ADJUSTING SHIM 41003118 N10-1 / N30-61 324 9 27 2,20
10035288-001 COVER GASKET BRAKE F20 41003118 N10-1 / N30-62 54 1 3 23,43
10078382-001 VIS H - M12 35/35 41003118 N10-1 / N30-63 324 12 36 1,59
10030533-001 MICRO SWITCH 41003118 N10-1 / N30-68-1 54 X 2 6 138,35

10035452-001 HEATER 41003118 N10-1 / N40-70-1 54 1 3 295,27

10030584-001 GASKET 41600181 N10-1 / N50-M-1 54 2 6 109,97

10030546-001 O RING 41600181 N10-1 / N50-M-2 54 2 6 5,70
10035444-001 PLUG 41600181 N10-1 / N50-R-1 54 2 6 31,31
10661119-001 SEAL 41600181 N10-1 / N50-R-2 54 2 6 3,95
10036473-001 BRAKE SAFETY 41600181 N10-1 / N50-S 54 2 6 146,87
10036483-001 CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT 41600181 N10-1 / N50-T 54 2 6 33,90
10046686-001 BRAKE RELEASE SCREW 41600181 N10-1 / N50-V 108 9 27 14,07

10102195-001 BOLT M16 10724407 - 10724408 N10-2 432 24 72 6,28

10102142-001 STUD H - M16 10724407 - 10724408 N10-3 432 24 72 0,77

10723804-001 PRIMARY GEAR BOX - ARRGT A 10723804 N20 27 1 46 307,21

10723805-001 PRIMARY GEAR BOX - ARRGT B 10723805 N20 27 1 46 307,21
10102200-001 GASKET 10723804 - 10723805 N20-51 54 1 8 24 2,39
10102104-001 PLUG 10723804 - 10723805 N20-52 54 8 26 9,51
10102201-001 GASKET 10723804 - 10723805 N20-53 54 2 16 48 27,13
10102137-001 MAGNETIC PLUG 10723804 - 10723805 N20-54 54 16 48 241,06
10102201-001 GASKET 10723804 - 10723805 N20-61 216 10 30 27,13

10891534-SPL Rev.02 NOV-BLM Page 2 de 13

Recommended quantity of spare

OVER 5 YEARS
parts

Crittical parts

REQUESTED

REQUESTED
1-5 YEARS
QUANTITY

QUANTITY
TOTAL

Minimum stock

Over 5 years
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION OF PART DRAWING NUMBER POSITION QUANTITY

spare parts

spare parts
operational

operational
1-5 years
INSTALLED

UNIT PRICE IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
EURO
10063418-001 PLUG 10723804 - 10723805 N20-62 216 10 30 38,93

10723785-001 SATELLITE HOLDER ASSEMBLY M14 10724407 - 10724408 N30 54 1 36 429,29

10714630-001 WHEEL 77 TH - M14 10723801 N40-80 54 1 12 397,88

10714632-001 WHEEL 48 TH - M22 10723801 N40-116 54 1 23 709,59

10723786-001 SATELLITE HOLDER ASSEMBLY M22 10724407 - 10724408 N60 54 1 92 434,26

10723793-001 EQUIPPED MAIN PINION 10724407 - 10724408 N70 54 1 66 427,43

10089509-001 TORQUE MEASURING 10724407 - 10724408 N80 54 2 4 326,54

10008076-001 TORQUE MEASURING SYSTEM 3100919 N90 54 8 212,25

10001771-001 MEASURING BOX 3100919 N90-1 54 2 4 7 756,00
10083307-001 SCREW H - M10 50/26 3100919 N90-35 324 12 24 0,47
10028011-001 CLAMP 3100919 N90-37 54 2 4 230,86
10081151-001 WASHER 3100919 N90-120 216 4 8 16 1,43

10724083-001 MOUNTING PARTS FOR JACK FRAME 10724083 G03 54 7 267,94

10008074-001 HEIGHT DETECTION 3101119 G04 9 9 275,18

10097350-001 PROXIMITY SWITCH 3101119 15 18 4 8 105,65
10029616-001 WASHER 3101119 16 54 12 24 0,10
10008015-001 TOOLING G05 1 4 298,02

10891534-SPL Rev.02 NOV-BLM Page 3 de 13

Recommended quantity of spare

OVER 5 YEARS
parts

Crittical parts

REQUESTED

REQUESTED
1-5 YEARS
QUANTITY

QUANTITY
TOTAL

Minimum stock

Over 5 years
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION OF PART DRAWING NUMBER POSITION QUANTITY

spare parts

spare parts
operational

operational
1-5 years
INSTALLED

UNIT PRICE IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
EURO
10068044-001 DYNAMOMETRIC SPANNER 1 1 1 1 159,75
10725418-001 SQUARE 1 1 1 331,43
10041618-001 TOOL EF 20 1 1 1 1 730,99
10724047-001 JACKING UNIT MCC 10724622 I01 3 281 298,81
10096372-001 CONVERTER 10724622 MC 3 1 1 1 548,54
10096476-001 COUPLING CORD TSX MICRO 10724622 1B1-1B2-1B3-2B1-2B2-2B3 18 1 1 92,49
10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR 10724622 1B1-1B2-1B3-2B1-2B2-2B3 18 X 1 1 296,67
10096551-001 NETWORK CABLE 10724622 2M1-SW 6 1 1 45,07
10096555-001 NETWORK CABLE 10724622 1M1-SW 6 1 1 34,58
10096578-001 SWITCH 2 100 TX + 2 100 FX 10724622 SW 3 X 1 1 1 467,93
10096635-001 COIL 110V 40-400Hz LC1-F500 10724622 AT1 3 X 1 2 2 256,25
10096668-001 POWER CONTACTOR 10724622 AT5 3 1 1 990,68
10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS 1NO+1NC 10724622 AT1-AT2-AT5 9 X 1 2 2 27,85
10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY 10724622 FANC-FNAP-GR-HC-RES 15 1 2 2 24,82
10096729-001 CONTROL RELAY 10724622 IS 3 1 2 2 21,86
10096738-001 BASE FOR RELAY 10724622 FP-PP-SP 9 1 30,10
10096739-001 CONTROL RELAY 10724622 FP-PP-SP 9 1 2 2 19,42
10096822-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 10724622 RT6-RT7 6 1 147,42
10096824-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 10724622 RT3-RT4 6 1 191,87
F1CI-F2CI-F3CI-F4CI-F5CI-
F6CI-P1CI-P2CI-P3CI-P4CI-
10096825-001 TRANSDUCER 10724622 54 X 1 1
P5CI-P6CI-S1CI-S2CI-S3CI-
S4CI-S5CI-S6CI 438,67

10891534-SPL Rev.02 NOV-BLM Page 4 de 13

Recommended quantity of spare

OVER 5 YEARS
parts

Crittical parts

REQUESTED

REQUESTED
1-5 YEARS
QUANTITY

QUANTITY
TOTAL

Minimum stock

Over 5 years
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION OF PART DRAWING NUMBER POSITION QUANTITY

spare parts

spare parts
operational

operational
1-5 years
INSTALLED

UNIT PRICE IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
EURO

F1SD-F2SD-F3SD-F4SD-F5SD-
10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY 2 C/O 10724622 F6SD-P1SD-P2SD-P3SD-P4SD- 54 1 2 2
P5SD-S1SD-S2SD-S3SD-
S4SD-S5SD-S6SD 265,99
10096835-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 10724622 RT5 3 1 409,30
10096836-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY 10724622 RT8 3 1 429,23
10096856-001 BLADES RESISTOR 45W 10724622 R1-R2-R3 9 1 189,07
F1R-F2R-F3R-F4R-F5R-F6R-
10097031-001 VARISTOR 18,0W 68V 10724622 P1R-P2R-P3R-P4R-P5R-P6R- 54 X 1 1
S1R-S2R-S3R-S4R-S5R-S6R 342,95

F1V-F2V-F3V-F4V-F5V-F6V-
10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE 25A 10724622 54 X 1 1
P1V-P2V-P3V-P4V-P5V-P6V-
S1V-S2V-S3V-S4V-S5V-S6V 27,85
10097050-001 FUSE 1A 10724622 1B1-1B2-1B3-2B1-2B2-2B3 18 10 20 20 1,77
10097523-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 F03-F04 6 1 2 2 78,70
10097524-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 F02-F05 6 1 2 2 89,14
10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 F01-F06 6 1 2 2 66,88
10097526-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 Q1 3 1 2 2 294,17
10097527-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 Q2 3 1 2 2 303,00
10097528-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 Q3 3 1 2 2 303,00
10097531-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10724622 F07-F08-F09 9 1 2 2 49,02
10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT 10724622 H1 3 1 2 2 21,05
10097549-001 LED RED PILOT LIGHT 10724622 H3 3 1 2 2 22,47
10097552-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT 10724622 H2 3 1 2 2 21,27

10891534-SPL Rev.02 NOV-BLM Page 5 de 13

Recommended quantity of spare

OVER 5 YEARS
parts

Internal components of NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO equipments are :

either produced by NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO,
either been selected and qualified by technical quality department of NATIONAL
OILWELL VARCO

The guarantee of proper working is only effective by using NATIONAL OILWELL

VARCO original spares parts.
Mounting of spares parts other than NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO supply involves
responsibility of fitter and user in a case of damage on goods and people.

Stock of spare parts

The parts subject to wear are available on stock and may be shipped immediately on
receipt of fax or [Link]. However, we recommend our customers to plan a preventive
stock of spare parts and replenish it on a regular basis so as to avoid all emergency
shipments which are always expensive.

How to order spare parts

When ordering any spare parts, please indicate :
- The name of vessel (or sub-structure for which this material is designed),
- The designation and general identification of part involved MECHANICAL,
ELECTRICAL, HYDRAULIC (these identification numbers appear on the front page
of the instruction manual and also on the identification plates of each main part),
- The designation and part mark number (see descriptive parts-list of sub-assemblies),
- The number of parts,
- The complete shipping address,
- The invoicing address,
- The requested date of delivery (for shipments made outside France, the customs
formality dead line should be taken into account),
- Means of transport.

Where to forward your order

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO

BRISSONNEAU et LOTZ MARINE
Service Rechanges
15, rue de la Métallurgie
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX
France
BLM@[Link] - Fax : (33) 2 40 68 37 37

In case of emergency :
Technical assistance : services-BLM@[Link]
Phone : (33) 2 40 68 36 00
Fax : (33) 2 40 68 36 22
G317
PART G
Identification Document
MECHANICAL PARTS

• Gear unit C150EF Arrgt A with PLMS 10724042 G01

• Gear unit C150EF Arrgt B with PLMS 10724041 G02

• C150EF mounting parts for jack frame 10724083 G03

• Leg height detection 10008074 G04

• Tooling 10008015 G05

ABR – 11/06/14 – Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-G

G01
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724042-001 Rev.01 MECANISME ARRGT A AVEC PLMS 10724408 GEAR UNIT ARRGT A WITH PLMS 13600 G01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 MECANISME ARRGT A SANS PLMS 10723808-001 GEAR UNIT ARRGT A WITHOUT PLMS
N90 1 SYSTÈME DE MESURE DE COUPLE 10008076-001 TORQUE MEASURING SYSTEM
N100 1 FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE 10008087-001 TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING
1 ADHESIF LOGO "NOV" 10079762-001 "NOV" LOGO STICKER

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723808-001 Rev.01 MECANISME ARRGT A SANS PLMS 10724408 GEAR UNIT ARRGT A WITHOUT PLMS 13575

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

N10 1 MONTAGE MOTEUR GAUCHE 10723823-001 LEFT MOTOR ASSEMBLY
N20 1 REDUCTEUR PRIMAIRE ARRGT A 10723804-001 PRIMARY GEAR BOX ARRGT A
N30 1 PORTE SATELLITES M14 EQUIPE 10723785-001 EQUIPPED M14 SATELLITES HOLDER
N40 1 PIECES REDUCTEUR SECONDAIRE C150EF 10723801-001 C150EF SECONDARY GEAR BOX PIECES
N70 1 PIGNON PRINCIPAL EQUIPE 10723793-001 EQUIPPED MAIN PINION
N110 1 DIVERSES PIECES CONSOMMABLES 10723806-001 VARIOUS CONSUMABLES PIECES

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723823-001 Rev.01 MONTAGE MOTEUR GAUCHE 10724408 LEFT MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1005 N10

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 MOTEUR ELECTRIQUE 10030826-001 ELECTRIC MOTOR
2 8 GOUJON 10102195-001 STUD
3 8 ECROU H 10102142-001 NUT H

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723804-001 Rev.04 REDUCTEUR PRIMAIRE ARRGT A 10723804 PRIMARY GEAR BOX ARRGT A 1625 N20

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 ARBRE LENT EQUIPE 10008128-001 SLOW SHAFT FITTED
4 1 CARTER - ARRGT A 10723896-001 GEAR CASE - ARRGT A
5 1 PIGNON ARBRE 10090929-001 SHAFT PINION
6 1 ROULEMENT 10087690-001 BEARING
7 1 BRIDE PALIER 10095810-001 FLANGE BEARING
8 6 VIS H 10102427-001 SCREW H
10 1 ARBRE INTERMEDIAIRE RAPIDE EQUIPE 10089986-001 FAST INTERMEDIATE SHAFT EQUIPPED
11 2 ROULEMENT 10087686-001 BEARING
12 1 BOITE A ROULEMENT 10087306-001 BEARING BOX
13 1 BOITE A ROULEMENT 10087307-001 BEARING BOX
14 6 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW H
15 1 EMMANCHEMENT ROUE / PIGNON 10089975-001 FITTING GEAR WHEEL / PINION
16 1 ENTRETOISE 10088501-001 SPACER
17 1 RONDELLE D'EXTRACTION 10088534-001 GETTING WASHER
18 1 RONDELLE D'EXTRACTION 10088547-001 GETTING WASHER
19 1 ROULEMENT 10087729-001 BEARING
20 1 ROULEMENT 10087728-001 BEARING
21 1 CIRCLIPS - I - 10102348-001 CIRCLIP - I -
22 1 CIRCLIPS - I - 10102355-001 CIRCLIP - I -
23 1 ARBRE INTERM LENT 10007682-001 INTERMED MAIN SHAFT
24 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10062369-001 O-RING
25 1 BAGUE BUTEE 10088512-001 THRUST RING
26 1 PALIER INTERMEDIAIRE 10087500-001 INTERMEDIATE BEARING
27 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10095969-001 O-RING
28 1 RONDELLE 10095812-001 ROUND FLANGE
29 1 BAGUE 10102208-001 RING
30 7 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW
31 1 COUVERCLE 10724272-001 COVER
32 1 COUVERCLE FERME 10095458-001 CLOSED COVER

Page 1 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723804-001 Rev.04 REDUCTEUR PRIMAIRE ARRGT A 10723804 PRIMARY GEAR BOX ARRGT A 1625 N20

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

33 6 VIS H 10030192-001 SCREW H
34 42 JOINT TORIQUE 10062371-001 O-RING
38 1 ENTRETOISE 10089020-001 SPACER
39 1 ROULEMENT 10082156-001 BEARING
42 2 JOINT 10067680-001 SEAL
44 6 VIS H 10102427-001 SCREW H
45 1 CARTER INTERMEDIAIRE EQUIPE - ARRGT A 10723900-001 EQUIPPED INTERMEDIATE CASE - ARRGT A
46 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10078313-001 O-RING
47 42 JOINT TORIQUE 10079489-001 O-RING
48 42 RONDELLE 10013632-001 WASHER
49 42 VIS H 10094988-001 SCREW H
50 3.00ML FIL DE FER 10102181-001 WIRE ANNEALED
51 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102200-001 GASKET, RING
52 1 BOUCHON MALE 10102104-001 MALE PLUG
53 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
54 1 BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE 10102137-001 MAGNETIC SCREW-PLUG
55 1 TUBE ALIMENTATION - ARRGT A 10092848-001 ALIMENTATION TUBE - ARRGT A
56 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102209-001 GASKET, RING
57 1 VIS H 10102427-001 SCREW H
58 1 JOINT TAPE DE VISITE 10819223-001 JOINT INSPECTION COVER
59 1 TAPE DE VISITE 10095680-001 INSPECTION PANEL
60 8 VIS H 10102400-001 SCREW H
61 4 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
62 4 BOUCHON MALE 10063418-001 MALE PLUG
63 1 ENSEMBLE RENIFLARD 10084783-001 SNIFTING-VALVE FITTING
64 1 PLAQUE DE FIRME 10086488-001 FIRM PLATE
65 4 CLOU CANNELE 10102133-001 GROOVED NAIL
66 1 PLAQUE D'AVERTISSEMENT 10086350-001 WARNING PLATE
67 2 ETIQUETTE 10086448-001 LABEL

Page 2 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723785-001 Rev.01 PORTE SATELLITES M14 EQUIPE 10723785 EQUIPPED M14 SATELLITES HOLDER 1255 N30

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

3 SATELLITE M14 EQUIPE 10723783-001 EQUIPPED M14 SATELLITE
70 1 PORTE SATELLITES M14 10714985-001 M14 SATELLITES HOLDER
71 1 ROULEMENT 10067679-001 BEARING
72 3 ENTRETOISE M14 10717648-001 M14 SPACER
75 3 AXE DE SATELLITE M14 10717646-001 M14 SATELLITE SHAFT
76 3 PLAQUETTE D'ARRET 10095171-001 STOP PLATE
77 6 SET DE RONDELLE DE BLOCAGE 10108413-001 SET LOCK WASHER
78 6 VIS H 10078382-001 SCREW H

Page 1 / 1
Tt
76
A 77 78
Cs
8.1 daN.m 74 A-A 73

72
75

Ø360
76 76

78 77 77 78 70

Tt n1112 Tt 426
Cs
8.1 daN.m A Cs
8.1 daN.m

EQUIPPED SATELLITES HOLDER PORTE SATELLITES EQUIPE

SCA. :
MASS : 1255 Kg ENS : P.S. : 6506993 ECH. : 2/15
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

02 Bearings/satellite shafts fitting deleted 07/02/14 ASO FMA TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED
This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10723785 02 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 08/03/13 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723801-001 Rev.02 PIECES REDUCTEUR SECONDAIRE C150EF 10723801 C150EF SECONDARY GEAR BOX PIECES 7100 N40

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 FOURREAU EQUIPE 10723850-001 EQUIPPED SLEEVE
N50 1 CARTER INTERIEUR EQUIPE 10723792-001 EQUIPPED INTERIOR CASE
N60 1 PORTE SATELLITES M22 EQUIPE 10723786-001 EQUIPPED M22 SATELLITES HOLDER
80 1 COURONNE M 14 10714630-001 WHEEL M 14
81 7.70ML JOINT CORDE 10724486-001 O-SEAL
115 3.70ML JOINT CORDE 10724486-001 O-SEAL
116 1 COURONNE M 22 10714632-001 WHEEL M 22
117 3.70ML JOINT CORDE 10724486-001 O-SEAL
125 18 RONDELLE 10060181-001 HARD-DRAWN WASHER
126 18 ECROU H 10068051-001 NUT H
130 18 ECROU H 10068284-001 NUT H

Page 1 / 1
Align flat sections between wheels and case
115 117 A-A
Aligner les méplats entre les roues et le carter 61

62 85 104 103 116 102 107 108 109

A 1712
80

96 98 97
122 122 105

106

100

Ø1220

n720

Ø925
99

101

122 122 110 111 112 95

89 120

A
130
Tt
81 86 87 53 54 88 121 125 126 247 daN.m
Cs

SECONDARY GEAR BOX REDUCTEUR SECONDAIRE

SCA. :
MASS : 7100 Kg ENS : P.S. : ECH. : 1/10
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10723801 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 19/03/13 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723792-001 Rev.02 CARTER INTERIEUR EQUIPE 10723792 EQUIPPED INTERIOR CASE 895 N50

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

53 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
54 1 BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE 10102137-001 MAGNETIC SCREW-PLUG
61 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
62 1 BOUCHON MALE 10063418-001 MALE PLUG
85 1 CARTER INTERIEUR 10714107-001 INTERIOR CASE
86 18 GOUPILLE 10724473-001 PIN
87 18 GOUJON 10066548-001 STUD
88 18 GOUPILLE 10724474-001 PIN
89 18 GOUJON 10094952-001 STUD

Page 1 / 1
A-A
Ø1220,1

62 85

910
80
Ø600
Ø1175
Ø1290

18x 86

1292
53
A A
54 18x 87 18x 89 18x 88

EQUIPPED INTERIOR CASE CARTER INTERIEUR EQUIPE

SCA. :
MASS : 895 Kg ENS : P.S. : ECH. : 2/30
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10723792 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 08/03/13 ASO by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723786-001 Rev.01 PORTE SATELLITES M22 EQUIPE 10723786 EQUIPPED M22 SATELLITES HOLDER 2890 N60

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

3 SATELLITE M22 EQUIPE 10723784-001 EQUIPPED M22 SATELLITE
95 1 PORTE SATELLITES M22 10714986-001 M22 SATELLITES HOLDER
96 1 DOUILLE DE ROULEMENT 10088031-001 BUSHING OF BEARING
97 1 PIGNON M 22 10090913-001 PIGNON M 22
98 1 ROULEMENT 10087740-001 BEARING
99 1 ENTRETOISE 10089022-001 SPACER
100 1 ROULEMENT 10066360-001 BEARING
101 1 CIRCLIPS - I - 10066319-001 CIRCLIP - I -
102 3 ENTRETOISE M22 10717649-001 M22 SPACER
106 3 AXE DE SATELLITE M22 10717647-001 M22 SATELLITE SHAFT
107 3 PLAQUETTE D'ARRET 10095172-001 STOP PLATE
108 6 SET DE RONDELLE DE BLOCAGE 10082708-001 SET LOCK WASHER
109 6 VIS H 10030160-001 SCREW H
110 1 ROULEMENT 10066350-001 BEARING
111 1 ENTRETOISE 10089023-001 SPACER
112 1 ROULEMENT 10067565-001 BEARING

Page 1 / 1
Tt A-A
107 A 108 109
Cs
19.5 daN.m 4x 105 104 103 102 111 112

106

110

0.045

0.035

0.046

0.045

0.05
Serrage maxi.
0.046
Ø600

Ø750
Max. fitting

Serrage maxi.
Serrage maxi.

Serrage maxi.

Max. fitting
Max. fitting

Max. fitting

Max. fitting
107 107 99 101

109 108 108 109 100 95 97 98 96

A
n1102 1000
Tt Tt
19.5 daN.m 19.5 daN.m
Cs Cs

EQUIPPED SATELLITES HOLDER PORTE SATELLITES EQUIPE

SCA. :
MASS : 2890 Kg ENS : P.S. : 6506994 ECH. : 2/15
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

02 Bearings/satellite shafts fitting deleted 07/02/14 ASO FMA TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED
This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10723786 02 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 18/03/13 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723793-001 Rev.01 PIGNON PRINCIPAL EQUIPE 10723793 EQUIPPED MAIN PINION 2585 N70

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

135 1 PIGNON PRINCIPAL 10717716-001 MAIN PINION
136 1 BAGUE 10089030-001 BUSH
137 3 JOINT 10066320-001 SEAL
138 1 COURONNE DE RETENUE 10089450-001 RETAINING CROWN
139 24 VIS H 10102435-001 SCREW H
140 1 ROULEMENT 10067548-001 BEARING
141 1 BAGUE D'ARRET EQUIPEE 10089983-001 STOP RING
180 1 BRIDE TUBE PLMS 10095821-001 FLANGE
181 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10049745-001 O-RING
182 4 VIS H 10030012-001 SCREW H
N80 1 MESURE DE COUPLE 10089509-001 TORQUE MEASURING

Page 1 / 1
Air pressed tightness
control (with soap)
Contrôle de l'étanchéité 3x 137 136
Tt
à l'air comprimé (au savon) 19.5 daN.m
Cs
181 180 A-A 135
A
0.045

0.332

Ø915,6
Ø720

Serrage maxi.

Serrage maxi.
Max. fitting

Max. fitting
1413 A
Tt
4x 182 141 140 24x 139 138 N80 175 176 19.5 daN.m
Cs

Tt Tt
4.7 daN.m 66 daN.m
Cs Cs

EQUIPPED MAIN PINION PIGNON PRINCIPAL EQUIPE

SCA. :
MASS : 2585 Kg ENS : P.S. : 3100457 ECH. : 2/15
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10723793 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 19/03/13 ASO by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10089509-001 Rev.01 MESURE DE COUPLE TORQUE MEASURING 3 N80

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

175 1 TUBE DE MESURE 10089768-001 MEASURING PIPING
176 1 MANCHON 10015009-001 STUD ADAPTOR

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10008076-001 Rev.01 SYSTÈME DE MESURE DE COUPLE 3100919 TORQUE MEASURING SYSTEM 11 N90

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 BOITE DE MESURE 10001771-001 MEASURING BOX
35 6 VIS H 10083307-001 SCREW H
36 6 RONDELLE CONTACT 10029250-001 CONTACT WASHER
37 1 BRIDE 10028011-001 CLAMP
38 2 COLLIER NYLON 10098138-001 NYLON TIE
120 4 RONDELLE 10081151-001 WASHER

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10008087-001 Rev.01 FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING 1 N100

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

48 1 CHAPEAU PLMS 10026063-001 PLMS COVER
49 4 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW H

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723806-001 Rev.02 DIVERSES PIECES CONSOMMABLES VARIOUS CONSUMABLES PIECES N110

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 PORAJOINT 10104293-001 PORAJOINT
2 ORASTOP FREINAGE MOYEN 10104045-001 ORASTOP MEDIUM LOCK
5.00KG GRAISSE 10103934-001 GREASE
3 CARTOUCHE SILICONE BLANC NEUTRE 10104152-001 CARTRIDGE OF SILICONE NEUTRAL WHITE
1 PATE A JOINT ORASEAL 10855904-001 GASKET SEAL PAST ORASEAL
1 ORASTOP FREINAGE FORT 10103990-001 LOCKING SCREW VARNISH

Page 1 / 1
G02
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724041-001 Rev.01 MECANISME ARRGT B AVEC PLMS 10724407 GEAR UNIT ARRGT B WITH PLMS 13600 G02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 MECANISME ARRGT B SANS PLMS 10723807-001 GEAR UNIT ARRGT B WITHOUT PLMS
N90 1 SYSTÈME DE MESURE DE COUPLE 10008076-001 TORQUE MEASURING SYSTEM
N100 1 FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE 10008087-001 TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING
1 ADHESIF LOGO "NOV" 10079762-001 "NOV" LOGO STICKER

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723807-001 Rev.01 MECANISME ARRGT B SANS PLMS 10724407 GEAR UNIT ARRGT B WITHOUT PLMS 13575

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

N10 1 MONTAGE MOTEUR DROIT 10723824-001 RIGHT MOTOR ASSEMBLY
N20 1 REDUCTEUR PRIMAIRE ARRGT B 10723805-001 PRIMARY GEAR BOX ARRGT B
N30 1 PORTE SATELLITES M14 EQUIPE 10723785-001 EQUIPPED M14 SATELLITES HOLDER
N40 1 PIECES REDUCTEUR SECONDAIRE C150EF 10723801-001 C150EF SECONDARY GEAR BOX PIECES
N70 1 PIGNON PRINCIPAL EQUIPE 10723793-001 EQUIPPED MAIN PINION
N110 1 DIVERSES PIECES CONSOMMABLES 10723806-001 VARIOUS CONSUMABLES PIECES

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723824-001 Rev.01 MONTAGE MOTEUR DROIT 10724407 RIGHT MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1005 N10

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 MOTEUR ELECTRIQUE 10030825-001 ELECTRIC MOTOR
2 8 GOUJON 10102195-001 STUD
3 8 ECROU H 10102142-001 NUT H

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723805-001 Rev.03 REDUCTEUR PRIMAIRE ARRGT B 10723805 PRIMARY GEAR BOX ARRGT B 1625 N20

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 ARBRE LENT EQUIPE 10008128-001 SLOW SHAFT FITTED
4 1 CARTER - ARRGT B 10723895-001 GEAR CASE - ARRGT B
5 1 PIGNON ARBRE 10090929-001 SHAFT PINION
6 1 ROULEMENT 10087690-001 BEARING
7 1 BRIDE PALIER 10095810-001 FLANGE BEARING
8 6 VIS H 10102427-001 SCREW H
10 1 ARBRE INTERMEDIAIRE RAPIDE EQUIPE 10089986-001 FAST INTERMEDIATE SHAFT EQUIPPED
11 2 ROULEMENT A ROULEAUX CYLINDRIQUE 10087686-001 BEARING
12 1 BOITE A ROULEMENT 10087306-001 BEARING BOX
13 1 BOITE A ROULEMENT 10087307-001 BEARING BOX
14 6 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW H
15 1 EMMANCHEMENT ROUE / PIGNON 10089975-001 FITTING GEAR WHEEL / PINION
16 1 ENTRETOISE 10088501-001 SPACER
17 1 RONDELLE D'EXTRACTION 10088534-001 GETTING WASHER
18 1 RONDELLE D'EXTRACTION 10088547-001 GETTING WASHER
19 1 ROULEMENT 10087729-001 BEARING
20 1 ROULEMENT 10087728-001 BEARING
21 1 CIRCLIPS - I - 10102348-001 CIRCLIP - I -
22 1 CIRCLIPS - I - 10102355-001 CIRCLIP - I -
23 1 ARBRE INTERMEDIAIRE LENT 10007682-001 INTERMEDEDIATE MAIN SHAFT
24 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10062369-001 O-RING
25 1 BAGUE BUTEE 10088512-001 THRUST RING
26 1 PALIER INTERMEDIAIRE 10087500-001 INTERMEDIATE BEARING
27 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10095969-001 O-RING
28 1 RONDELLE 10095812-001 ROUND FLANGE
29 1 BAGUE 10102208-001 RING
30 7 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW H
31 1 COUVERCLE 10724272-001 COVER
32 1 COUVERCLE FERME 10095458-001 CLOSED COVER

Page 1 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723805-001 Rev.03 REDUCTEUR PRIMAIRE ARRGT B 10723805 PRIMARY GEAR BOX ARRGT B 1625 N20

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

33 6 VIS H 10030192-001 SCREW H
34 42 JOINT TORIQUE 10062371-001 O-RING
38 1 ENTRETOISE 10089020-001 SPACER
39 1 ROULEMENT 10082156-001 BEARING
42 2 JOINT 10067680-001 SEAL
44 6 VIS H 10102427-001 SCREW H
45 1 CARTER INTERMEDIAIRE EQUIPE - ARRGT B 10723901-001 EQUIPPED INTERMEDIATE CASE - ARRGT B
46 1 JOINT TORIQUE 10078313-001 O-RING
47 42 JOINT TORIQUE 10079489-001 O-RING
48 42 RONDELLE 10013632-001 WASHER
49 42 VIS H 10094988-001 SCREW H
50 3.00ML FIL DE FER 10102181-001 WIRE ANNEALED
51 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102200-001 GASKET, RING
52 1 BOUCHON MALE 10102104-001 MALE PLUG
53 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
54 1 BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE 10102137-001 MAGNETIC SCREW
55 1 TUBE ALIMENTATION - ARRGT B 10092847-001 ALIMENTATION TUBE - ARRGT B
56 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102209-001 GASKET, RING
57 1 VIS H 10102427-001 SCREW H
58 1 JOINT TAPE DE VISITE 10819223-001 JOINT INSPECTION COVER
59 1 TAPE DE VISITE 10095680-001 INSPECTION PANEL
60 8 VIS H 10102400-001 SCREW H
61 4 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
62 4 BOUCHON MALE 10063418-001 MALE PLUG
63 1 ENSEMBLE RENIFLARD 10084783-001 SNIFTING-VALVE FITTING
64 1 PLAQUE DE FIRME 10086488-001 FIRM PLATE
65 4 CLOU CANNELE 10102133-001 GROOVED NAIL
66 1 PLAQUE D'AVERTISSEMENT 10086350-001 WARNING PLATE
67 2 ETIQUETTE 10086448-001 LABEL

Page 2 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723785-001 Rev.01 PORTE SATELLITES M14 EQUIPE 10723785 EQUIPPED M14 SATELLITES HOLDER 1255 N30

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
Tt
76
A 77 78
Cs
8.1 daN.m 74 A-A 73

72
75

Ø360
76 76

78 77 77 78 70

Tt n1112 Tt 426
Cs
8.1 daN.m A Cs
8.1 daN.m

EQUIPPED SATELLITES HOLDER PORTE SATELLITES EQUIPE

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
Align flat sections between wheels and case
115 117 A-A
Aligner les méplats entre les roues et le carter 61

62 85 104 103 116 102 107 108 109

A 1712
80

96 98 97
122 122 105

106

100

Ø1220

n720

Ø925
99

101

122 122 110 111 112 95

89 120

A
130
Tt
81 86 87 53 54 88 121 125 126 247 daN.m
Cs

SECONDARY GEAR BOX REDUCTEUR SECONDAIRE

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
A-A
Ø1220,1

62 85

910
80
Ø600
Ø1175
Ø1290

18x 86

1292
53
A A
54 18x 87 18x 89 18x 88

EQUIPPED INTERIOR CASE CARTER INTERIEUR EQUIPE

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
Tt A-A
107 A 108 109
Cs
19.5 daN.m 4x 105 104 103 102 111 112

106

110

0.045

0.035

0.046

0.045

0.05
Serrage maxi.
0.046
Ø600

Ø750
Max. fitting

Serrage maxi.
Serrage maxi.

Serrage maxi.

Max. fitting
Max. fitting

Max. fitting

Max. fitting
107 107 99 101

109 108 108 109 100 95 97 98 96

A
n1102 1000
Tt Tt
19.5 daN.m 19.5 daN.m
Cs Cs

EQUIPPED SATELLITES HOLDER PORTE SATELLITES EQUIPE

02 Bearings/satellite shafts fitting deleted 07/02/14 ASO FMA TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED
This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10723786 02 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 18/03/13 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723793-001 Rev.01 PIGNON PRINCIPAL EQUIPE 10723793 EQUIPPED MAIN PINION 2585 N70

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
Air pressed tightness
control (with soap)
Contrôle de l'étanchéité 3x 137 136
Tt
à l'air comprimé (au savon) 19.5 daN.m
Cs
181 180 A-A 135
A
0.045

0.332

Ø915,6
Ø720

Serrage maxi.

Serrage maxi.
Max. fitting

Max. fitting
1413 A
Tt
4x 182 141 140 24x 139 138 N80 175 176 19.5 daN.m
Cs

Tt Tt
4.7 daN.m 66 daN.m
Cs Cs

EQUIPPED MAIN PINION PIGNON PRINCIPAL EQUIPE

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

175 1 TUBE DE MESURE 10089768-001 MEASURING PIPING
176 1 MANCHON 10015009-001 STUD ADAPTOR

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10008076-001 Rev.01 SYSTÈME DE MESURE DE COUPLE 3100919 TORQUE MEASURING SYSTEM 11 N90

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10008087-001 Rev.01 FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING 1 N100

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

48 1 CHAPEAU PLMS 10026063-001 PLMS COVER
49 4 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW H

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10723806-001 Rev.02 DIVERSES PIECES CONSOMMABLES VARIOUS CONSUMABLES PIECES N110

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
G03
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
C150EF MOUNTING PARTS FOR JACK
10724083-001 Rev.03 PIECES MONTAGE DANS CHASSIS C150EF 10724083 130 G03
FRAME

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 DOUILLE 10717735-001 BUSH
2 1 JOINT 10723776-001 SEAL
3 1 COUVERCLE 10717727-001 COVER
4 10 VIS H 10080828-001 SCREW H
5 2 JOINT FOURREAU 10724593-001 SLEEVE SEAL
6 4 VIS DE RETENUE 10023992-001 HOLD-DOWN SCREW
7 1 BUTEE 10724587-001 SHIM
8 4 PLAQUETTE D'ARRET 10095675-001 STOP PLATE
9 8 VIS H 10030160-001 SCREW H
10 1 BUTEE 10724588-001 SHIM
11 2 BUTEE 10724589-001 SHIM
12 1 ENTRETOISE C150EF 10717725-001 C150EF SPACER
21 10 VIS H 10080832-001 SCREW H
N120 1 FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE C150EF 10724586-001 C150EF TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING
N130 1 VANNE EQUIPEE 10861704-001 EQUIPPED VALVE

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724586-001 Rev.03 FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE C150EF 10724586 C150EF TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING 32 N120

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

15 1 JOINT 10724591-001 GASKET
16 1 CHAPEAU 10724590-001 COVER
17 1 PRESSE ETOUPE 10856699-001 CABLE GLAND
18 1 JOINT DE TAPE 10095915-001 PANEL GASKET
19 1 TAPE DE VISITE 10095679-001 INSPECTION PANEL
20 6 VIS H 10080828-001 SCREW H

Page 1 / 1
A A-A
15 16

530
20 x6

Sticked panel gasket

Joint de tape collé

A
500 172

C150EF TORQUE MEASURING CLOSING FERMETURE MESURE DE COUPLE C150EF +10%

SCA. :
MASS : 32 Kg 0 ENS : P.S. : ECH. : 1/4
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR
BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10724586 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 15/04/13 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10861704-001 Rev.02 VANNE EQUIPEE 10861704 EQUIPPED VALVE 1.3 N130

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

30 1 JOINT RONDELLE 10102201-001 GASKET, RING
31 1 BOUCHON 10114571-001 PLUG
32 1 ADAPTEUR EQUIPE 10069822-001 ADAPTOR
33 1 COUDE ORIENTABLE 10068303-001 SWIVEL ELBOW
34 1 UNION MALE 10890566-001 MALE STUD
35 1 VANNE A BOISSEAU SPHERIQUE 10114531-001 SPHERIC TAP
36 1 BOUCHON MALE 10114530-001 MALE PLUG

Page 1 / 1
30 30

31 31

32 32

33 36 33

34 35 34

EQUIPPED VALVE VANNE EQUIPEE

+10%
SCA. :
MASS : 1.3 Kg 0 ENS : P.S. : ECH. :

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR

BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 SUPPORT DETECTEUR DE HAUTEUR 10008072-001 HEIGHT DETECTION SUPPORT
2 1 REDUCTEUR 10079355-001 REDUCTION GEAR
3 8 VIS H 10029997-001 SCREW H
4 8 ECROU H 10029753-001 NUT H
5 1 PIGNON FOU 10017854-001 PINION
6 1 VIS H 10102404-001 SCREW H
7 1 RONDELLE D'ARRET 10095072-001 STOP WASHER
8 1 BOITIER 10011732-001 BOX
9 1 BOITE DERIVATION EQUIPEE 10008039-001 EQUIPPED DERIVATION BOX
10 4 VIS H 10029972-001 SCREW H
11 4 ECROU H 10029711-001 NUT H
12 4 RONDELLE CONTACT 10029219-001 CONTACT WASHER
13 1 DISQUE DETECTION 10015457-001 DETECTION DISC
14 1 VIS HC 10102499-001 SCREW HC
15 2 DETECTEUR DE PROXIMITE 10097350-001 PROXIMITY SWITCH
15 4 COLLIER NYLON NOIR 10098146-001 NYLON TIE BLACK
15 1 ETIQUETTE SENSOR 1 10907605-001 TAG SENSOR 1
15 1 ETIQUETTE SENSOR 2 10907606-001 TAG SENSOR 2
16 6 RONDELLE 10029616-001 WASHER

Page 1 / 1
G05
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10008015-001 Rev.03 OUTILLAGE + DIVERS TOOLING 73 G05

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 CONTROLE D'ETANCHEITE 10093455-001 TIGHTNESS CONTROL
1 CLE DYNAMOMETRIQUE A CLIQUET 10068044-001 DYNAMOMETRIC SPANNER
1 CARRE D'ENTRAINEMENT 10725418-001 DRIVING SQUARE
1 OUTILLAGE 10041618-001 TOOL
2 OUTILLAGE DE MONTAGE 10089508-001 MOUNTING TOOL
1 CALE REGLAGE COUVERCLE 10037972-001 ADJUSTING SHIM COVER
2 ANNEAU DE LEVAGE 10102586-001 LIFTING EYE
3 GABARIT CREMAILERE C150 EQUIPE 10008370-001 EQUIPPED RACK C150 TEMPLATE
1 CLE SERRAGE PLMS 10023762-001 PLMS TIGHTENING KEY
1 GENERATEUR DE COURANT 10096388-001 CURRENT POWER SUPPLY

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10861705-001 Rev.01 TUYAU DE NIVEAU 10861705 LEVEL HOSE 0.4

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 CORPS FILETE DE COUPLEUR A CAME 10861691-001 CAM AND GROOVE COUPLING THREADED BODY
2 1 FLEXIBLE SOUPLE TRANSPARENT EQUIPE 10861697-001 EQUIPPED FLEXIBLE TRANSPARENT PVC HOSE

Page 1 / 1
A
A

Detail A
1 1

2 2

LEVEL HOSE TUYAU DE NIVEAU

+10%
SCA. :
MASS : 0.4 Kg 0 ENS : P.S. : ECH. :

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR

BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 ETIQUETTE 10863903-001 LABEL
2 1 BOUCHON MALE 10866312-001 MALE PLUG

Page 1 / 1
If any, remove plug / seal and replace them by plug
mark 2 in part list.
Le cas échéant, enlever bouchon / joint et les
remplacer par le bouchon repère 2 de la nomenclature.

If any, remove level label.

2 Le cas échéant, enlever l'étiquette de niveau. 2

A A

415

415
100 Detail A 100

LEVEL PARTS PIECES DE NIVEAU

+10%
SCA. :
MASS : 0.3 Kg 0 ENS : P.S. : ECH. :

NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO MATERIAL : INVENTOR

BLM Products NOV - BLM 15 RUE DE LA METALLURGIE
DRAWING - PLAN IND FOLIO
44482 CARQUEFOU CEDEX (NANTES) FRANCE
Tél: (33) 2 40 68 36 00 Fax: (33) 2 40 68 36 10 / 22 E-mail: blm@[Link]

TRADE SECRET - UNAUTHORIZED COPYING PROHIBITED

This document is the property of NOV - BLM and contains confidential and proprietary information owned
FORMAT
A3
10866981 01 1 / 1
01 Issued for approval 20/02/14 ASO FMA by NOV - BLM . Any copying use or disclosure of it without the written permission of NOV - BLM is strictly prohibited.
The material is protected under trade secret and unfair competition laws and the expression of Ce plan est notre propriété. Il est considèré comme confidentiel et ne pourra
the information contained therein is protected under copyright laws.
IND. MODIFICATION DATE DES VER APP Violations thereof may result in criminal penalties and fines être utilisé ou communiqué à des tiers sans notre autorisation écrite
PART I
Identification Document
ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS

• Motor control cabinet 10724047 I01

10724622
 Jacking components 10724649

• Central control console 10724048 I02

10724624
 Central console components 10731538

I03
• Brake control button box 10724049 10725190

I04
• Local control console 10724050 10725189

I05
• PLC backup control chest 10724051 10724860

I06
• Emergency jacking control chest 10724052 10724861

I07
• Air resistor control chest 10725110 10725111

ABR – 12/06/14 – Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-I-A

I01
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724047-001 Rev.02 APPAREILLAGE JACKING 10724622 MOTOR CONTROL CABINET 2700 I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 CHASSIS APPAREILLAGE JACKING 10724694-001 JACKING CONTROL GEAR FRAME
1 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724649-001 JACKING COMPONENTS I01
1 TOLERIE ARMOIRE JACKING 10724662-001 LOCKER METAL SHEET
1 CABLES APPAREILLAGE 18xC150EF 10724767-001 CONTROL GEAR CABLES
1 ETIQUETTE REPERAGE PHASES ALIM 10099936-001 LABEL
1 ETIQUETTE RESEAU 10724775-001 NETWORK LABEL
1 ETIQUETTE DE FONCTION ET CALIBRATION 10725016-001 FUNCTION AND CALIBRATION LABEL

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1B1 1 EMBASE SORTIE 16S 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
1B1-1M12 1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
1B2 1 EMBASE SORTIE 16S 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
1B2-1M13 1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
1B3 1 EMBASE SORTIE 16S 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
1B3-1M16 1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
1M1 1 MODULE ETHERNET MODBUS 10549296-001 ETHERNET MODBUS MODULUS
1M10 1 ALIMENTATION AUXILIAIRE 10724658-001 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
1M11 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
1M12 1 CONNECTEUR MODULE E/S 10549319-001 CONNECTOR I/O MODULUS
1M12 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS
1M13 1 CONNECTEUR MODULE E/S 10549319-001 CONNECTOR I/O MODULUS
1M13 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS
1M14 1 ALIMENTATION AUXILIAIRE 10724658-001 AUXILIARY SUPPLY
1M15 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
1M16 1 CONNECTEUR MODULE E/S 10549319-001 CONNECTOR I/O MODULUS
1M16 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS
1M17 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS
1M18 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
1M19 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
1M1-SW 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10096555-001 NETWORK CABLE
1M2 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
1M2 1 FUSIBLE 10725201-001 FUSE
1M2 1 FUSIBLE 10725203-001 FUSE
1M20 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
1M21 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
1M22 1 MODULE 1 ENTREE COMPTAGE RAPIDE 10549494-001 1 FAST COUNTING INTPUT MODULUS
1M23 1 MODULE 1 ENTREE COMPTAGE RAPIDE 10549494-001 1 FAST COUNTING INTPUT MODULUS

Page 1 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1M24 1 MODULE 1 ENTREE COMPTAGE RAPIDE 10549494-001 1 FAST COUNTING INTPUT MODULUS
1M3 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
1M4 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
1M5 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
1M6 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
1M7 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
1M8 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
1M9 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
2B1 1 EMBASE SORTIE 16S 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
2B1-2M5 1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
2B2 1 EMBASE SORTIE 16S 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
2B2-2M7 1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
2B3 1 EMBASE SORTIE 16S 10096483-001 OUTPUT COUPLING CONNECTOR
2B3-2M8 1 CORDON LIAISON 10096476-001 COUPLING CORD
2M1 1 MODULE ETHERNET MODBUS 10549296-001 ETHERNET MODBUS MODULUS
2M10 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
2M11 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
2M1-SW 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10749539-001 NETWORK CABLE
2M2 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
2M3 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
2M4 1 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
2M5 1 CONNECTEUR MODULE E/S 10549319-001 CONNECTOR I/O MODULUS
2M5 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS
2M6 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
2M7 1 CONNECTEUR MODULE E/S 10549319-001 CONNECTOR I/O MODULUS
2M7 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS
2M8 1 CONNECTEUR MODULE E/S 10549319-001 CONNECTOR I/O MODULUS
2M8 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS

Page 2 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

2M9 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
AL1 1 ALIMENTATION 10097923-001 POWER SUPPLY
AL2 1 ALIMENTATION 10097922-001 POWER SUPPLY
AL3 1 ALIMENTATION 10097922-001 POWER SUPPLY
AT 1 AUTOTRANSFORMATEUR 10749379-001 AUTOTRANSFORMER
AT1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10724647-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT1 2 BOBINE 10096635-001 COIL
AT1 1 CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES 1F+1O 10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS 1NO+1NC
AT2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10096657-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT2 1 BOBINE 10100241-001 COIL
AT2 1 CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES 1F+1O 10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS 1NO+1NC
AT2 1 EQUERRE DE RACCORDEMENT LARGE 10741376-001 CONNECTING BAR
AT2 6 CAPOT BORNE CONTACTEUR 10096784-001 CONTACTOR TERMINAL PROTECTION
AT3 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097913-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT4 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097913-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT5 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10096668-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT5 1 BOBINE 10114001-001 COIL
AT5 1 CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES 1F+1O 10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS 1NO+1NC
AT5 6 CAPOT BORNE CONTACTEUR 10096784-001 CONTACTOR TERMINAL PROTECTION
AT6 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097937-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT6 1 PLATINE ADAPTATION 10097949-001 PLATINUM ADAPTATION
AT7 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097937-001 POWER CONTACTOR
AT7 1 PLATINE ADAPTATION 10097949-001 PLATINUM ADAPTATION
AT8 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097869-001 POWER CONTACTOR
Bornes 1-2 2 BORNE RESSORT 10724876-001 TERMINAL UNIT
Bornes 1-2 1 FLASQUE BORNE RESSORT 10724877-001 TERMINAL UNIT END SIDE
Bornes 1-2 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724879-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
Bornes 3-4 2 BLOC DE JONCTION 10097826-001 TERMINAL BLOCK

Page 3 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Bornes 3-4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097829-001 TERMINAL UNIT
Bornes 3-4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10098125-001 TERMINAL UNIT
Bornes 5-10 12 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
Bornes 5-10 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE 3 LEADS
Bornes 5-10 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BR1 1 BLOC REPARTITION 10097843-001 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
BR2 1 BLOC REPARTITION 10097843-001 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
CH 1 COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10648989-001 HOUR COUNTER
CH1 1 COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10648989-001 HOUR COUNTER
CH1...4 1 ETIQUETTE COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10788946-001 LABEL
CH2 1 COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10648989-001 HOUR COUNTER
CH3 1 COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10648989-001 HOUR COUNTER
CH4 1 COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10648989-001 HOUR COUNTER
CT1 1 TRANSFORMATEUR DE COURANT 10724635-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F01 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F02 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097524-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F03 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097523-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F04 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097523-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F05 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097524-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F06 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F07 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097531-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F08 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097531-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F09 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097531-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F1CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F1CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
F1CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
F1CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
F1F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR

Page 4 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

F1F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F1R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
F1SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
F1TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
F1TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F1UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F1V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
F2CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F2CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
F2CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
F2CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
F2F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F2F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F2R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
F2SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
F2TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
F2TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F2UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F2V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
F3CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F3CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
F3CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
F3CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
F3F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F3F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F3R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
F3SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
F3TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

Page 5 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

F3TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F3UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F3V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
F4CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F4CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
F4CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
F4CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
F4F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F4F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F4R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
F4SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
F4TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
F4TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F4UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F4V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
F5CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F5CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
F5CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
F5CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
F5F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F5F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F5R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
F5SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
F5TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
F5TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F5UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F5V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
F6CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Page 6 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

F6CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
F6CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
F6CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
F6F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F6F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F6R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
F6SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
F6TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
F6TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
F6UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
F6V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
FANC 1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
FANC 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
FANC 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
FANP 1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
FANP 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
FANP 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
FP 1 EMBASE RELAIS DE CONTRÔLE 10096738-001 BASE FOR CONTROL RELAY
FP 1 RELAIS 10096739-001 CONTROL RELAY
GR 1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
GR 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
GR 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
H1 1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
H1 1 ETIQUETTE 10099801-001 LABEL
H2 1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097552-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
H2 1 ETIQUETTE 10099841-001 LABEL
H3 1 VOYANT ROUGE A LED 10097549-001 LED RED PILOT LIGHT
H3 1 ETIQUETTE DEFAUT ISOLEMENT 10724646-001 LABEL

Page 7 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

HC 1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
HC 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
HC 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
IC 1 CONTROLEUR ISOLEMENT 10725555-001 INSULATION CONTROLLER
IS 1 RELAIS 10096729-001 CONTROL RELAY
IS 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
IS 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
L4-L5 2 BORNE RESSORT 10724876-001 TERMINAL UNIT
L4-L5 1 FLASQUE BORNE RESSORT 10724877-001 TERMINAL UNIT END SIDE
MC 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096372-001 CONVERTER
P1CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
P1CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
P1CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
P1CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
P1F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P1F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P1R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
P1SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
P1TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
P1TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
P1UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P1V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
P2CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
P2CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
P2CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
P2CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
P2F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P2F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR

Page 8 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

P2R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
P2SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
P2TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
P2TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
P2UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P2V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
P3CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
P3CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
P3CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
P3CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
P3F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P3F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P3R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
P3SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
P3TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
P3TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
P3UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P3V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
P4CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
P4CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
P4CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
P4CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
P4F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P4F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P4R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
P4SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
P4TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
P4TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER

Page 9 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

P4UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P4V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
P5CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
P5CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
P5CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
P5CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
P5F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P5F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P5R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
P5SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
P5TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
P5TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
P5UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P5V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
P6CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
P6CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
P6CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
P6CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
P6F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P6F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P6R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
P6SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
P6TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
P6TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
P6UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
P6V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
PLUG 1 PRISE DE COURANT 10097789-001 CURRENT SOCKET
PP 1 EMBASE RELAIS DE CONTRÔLE 10096738-001 BASE FOR CONTROL RELAY

Page 10 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

PP 1 RELAIS 10096739-001 CONTROL RELAY
Q0 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q0 3 PRISE AVANT 10702878-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONNECTOR
Q1 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097526-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q2 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097527-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q3 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097528-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q3 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE DISJONCTEUR 10724634-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
Q4 1 DISJONCTEUR 10724644-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
R1 1 RESISTANCE RECHAUFFAGE 10096861-001 RESISTOR
R2 1 RESISTANCE RECHAUFFAGE 10096861-001 RESISTOR
R3 1 RESISTANCE RECHAUFFAGE 10096861-001 RESISTOR
RAT1 1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
RAT1 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
RAT1 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
RES 1 RELAIS 10096728-001 CONTROL RELAY
RES 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
RES 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
RM 1 RELAIS 10097910-001 CONTROL RELAY
RT3 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10096824-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
RT4 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10096824-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
RT5 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10096835-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
RT5 1 APPAREIL DE REINITIALISATION ELECTRIQUE 10668026-001 ELECTRICAL REMOTE TRIPPING
RT5 6 CAPOT BORNE CONTACTEUR 10096784-001 CONTACTOR TERMINAL PROTECTION
RT6 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10096822-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
RT7 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10096822-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
RT8 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10096836-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
RT8 6 CAPOT BORNE RELAIS THERMIQUE 10096789-001 THERMAL RELAY PROTECTION
RT8 1 APPAREIL DE REINITIALISATION ELECTRIQUE 10668026-001 ELECTRICAL REMOTE TRIPPING

Page 11 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

S1CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S1CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
S1CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
S1CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
S1F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S1F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S1R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
S1SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
S1TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
S1TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
S1UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S1V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
S2CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S2CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
S2CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
S2CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
S2F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S2F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S2R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
S2SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
S2TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
S2TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
S2UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S2V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
S3CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S3CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
S3CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
S3CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER

Page 12 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

S3F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S3F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S3R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
S3SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
S3TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
S3TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
S3UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S3V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
S4CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S4CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
S4CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
S4CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
S4F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S4F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S4R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
S4SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
S4TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
S4TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
S4UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S4V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
S5CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S5CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
S5CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
S5CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
S5F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S5F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S5R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
S5SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY

Page 13 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

S5TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
S5TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
S5UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S5V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
S6CB 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097555-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S6CB 1 CONTACT AUXILIAIRE 10702886-001 AUXILIARY CONTACT
S6CB 1 CACHE BORNE DISJONCTEUR 10096801-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER TERMINAL PROT.
S6CI 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096825-001 TRANSDUCER
S6F1 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S6F2 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S6R 1 VARISTANCE 10097031-001 VARISTOR
S6SD 1 RELAIS A THERMIST PTC 10096830-001 PTC THERMISTOR RELAY
S6TH 1 RELAIS PROTECTION THERMIQUE 10097901-001 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
S6TI 1 TRANSFORMATEUR D'INTENSITE 10098277-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
S6UP 1 CONTACTEUR INVERSEUR 10097868-001 POWER CONTACTOR
S6V 1 REDRESSEUR PONT MONO 10097034-001 RECTIFIER MODULE
SP 1 EMBASE RELAIS DE CONTRÔLE 10096738-001 BASE FOR CONTROL RELAY
SP 1 RELAIS 10096739-001 CONTROL RELAY
SW 1 ROUTEUR 10096578-001 SWITCH
T1 1 TRANSFORMATEUR TENSION 10098294-001 TRANSFORMER
T1 1 CAPOT PROTECTION TRANSFORMATEUR 10099339-001 COVER FOR PROTECTION TRANSFO
T2 1 TRANSFORMATEUR 10099462-001 TRANSFORMER
T3 1 TRANSFORMATEUR FREIN 18 MOTEURS 10110141-001 BRAKE TRANSFORMER 18 MOTORS
TERRE 2 BARRETTE DE TERRE 10749333-001 EARTH CONNECTING BAR
TERRE 4 ISOLATEUR MALE FEMELLE 10096253-001 CABLE DUCTING
UVW 54 BORNE 10703115-001 TERMINAL UNIT
UVW 108 CAPOT BORNE 10703147-001 COVER TERMINAL UNIT
V1 1 VENTILATEUR FILTRE 10098267-001 FAN

Page 14 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

V1 1 GRILLE DE SORTIE 10098268-001 OUTPUT GRID
V2 1 VENTILATEUR FILTRE 10098267-001 FAN
V2 1 GRILLE DE SORTIE 10098268-001 OUTPUT GRID
V3 1 GRILLE DE SORTIE 10098268-001 OUTPUT GRID
V3 1 VENTILATEUR FILTRE 10098267-001 FAN
X0 82 BLOC DE JONCTION 10097810-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X0 2 FLASQUE EXTREMITE 10097764-001 END SIDE
X0 1 REPERES PAIRS / IMPAIRS 10665728-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARKING
X0 1 REPERES PAIRS / IMPAIRS 10665757-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARKING
X0 1 REPERES PAIRS / IMPAIRS 10665730-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARKING
X0 1 REPERES PAIRS / IMPAIRS 10724656-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARKING
X0 1 REPERES PAIRS / IMPAIRS 10724657-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARKING
X0....X10 10 PORTE ETIQUETTE 10749826-001 LABEL HOLDER
X1 36 BORNE RESSORT 10724876-001 TERMINAL UNIT
X1 1 FLASQUE BORNE RESSORT 10724877-001 TERMINAL UNIT END SIDE
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724879-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724880-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724881-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724882-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724883-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724884-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724885-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X1 1 REPERE BORNE RESSORT 10724886-001 TERMINAL UNIT MARK
X10 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X10 25 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X10 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X10 1 REPERE BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X10 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING

Page 15 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

X2 36 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X2 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X2 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X2 1 REPERE BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X2 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X2 1 REPERES BORNES 10551117-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 72 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X3 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551117-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551118-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551119-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551120-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X3 1 REPERES BORNES 10551121-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X4 54 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X4 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X4 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X4 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X4 1 REPERES BORNES 10551117-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X4 1 REPERES BORNES 10551118-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X4 1 REPERES BORNES 10551119-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X5 60 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X5 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING

Page 16 / 17
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724649-001 Rev.06 COMPOSANTS JACKING 18xC150EF 10724622 JACKING COMPONENTS I01

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551117-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551118-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551119-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X6 10 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X6 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X6 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X7 25 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X7 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X7 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X7 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X7 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X8 10 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X8 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X8 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X9 21 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X9 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X9 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X9 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X9 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
100 BUTEE D'ARRET 10749822-001 STOP THRUST
10 BARRETTE DE PONTAGE 10749819-001 BRIDGE STRAP

Page 17 / 17
I02
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724048-001 Rev.02 PUPITRE DE COMMANDE CENTRAL 10724624 CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE I02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 TOLERIE PUPITRE CENTRAL 10544627-001 CENTRAL CONSOLE SHEET METAL
1 CHASSIS PUPITRE JACKING 10549888-001 JACKING DESK FRAME
1 ETIQUETTE RESEAU 10724775-001 NETWORK LABEL
1 COMPOSANTS PUPITRE C150EF 10731538-001 CENTRAL CONSOLE COMPONENTS I02

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10731538-001 Rev.03 COMPOSANTS PUPITRE C150EF 10724624 CENTRAL CONSOLE COMPONENTS I02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

AL1 1 ALIMENTATION 10097923-001 POWER SUPPLY
AL2 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10096373-001 CONVERTER
BAARE IE 0,50ML BARRE 10097697-001 BAR
BARRE IE 2 ISOLATEUR MALE FEMELLE 10096253-001 CABLE DUCTING
BARRE IE 2 SUPPORT INCLINE 10096043-001 INCLINED MOUNTING BRACKET
BARRE IE 4 VIS H 10096054-001 SCREW H
BARRE IE 2 ECROU A AGRAFE 10096038-001 NUT
BARRE IE 1 ETIQUETTES IE POUR BARRE DE TERRE 10907595-001 IE LABELS FOR EARTH BAR
BARRE PE 2 ISOLATEUR MALE FEMELLE 10096251-001 ISOLATOR
BARRE PE 2 ECROU POUR DIN SYMETRIQUE 10096128-001 NUT FOR DIN SYMMETRICAL
BARRE PE 2 VIS CS 10096100-001 SCREW CS
BARRE PE 4 RONDELLE CONTACT 10029207-001 CONTACT WASHER
BARRE PE 0,50ML BARRE 10097697-001 BAR
BARRE PE 1 ETIQUETTES PE POUR BARRE DE TERRE 10907596-001 PE LABELS FOR EARTH BAR
CABLE 220 MANCHON DE REPERAGE BLANC 10098084-001 WHITE CABLE MARK
CABLE 220 EMBOUT 10096025-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 20 EMBOUT 10096027-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 70 COSSE 10096304-001 FASTON LUG
CABLE 200,00ML CABLE 10097672-001 CABLE
CABLE 3,00ML CABLE 10097603-001 CABLE
CV 1 CONVERTISSEUR 10731528-001 CONVERTER
D1-D2 2 TERMINAL DE DIALOGUE 10109185-001 DIALOGUE CONSOLE
ETIQUETTE 1 ETIQUETTE PUPITRE CENTRAL JACKING 10110459-001 LABELS FOR CENTRAL DESK
F1-F3 2 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F2 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097530-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
H1 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097286-001 HEAD BUTTONS
H1 1 LENTILLE VOYANT ROUGE 10097285-001 RED FLAT LENSE
H1 1 CORPS DE VOYANT 10097287-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT

Page 1 / 4
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10731538-001 Rev.03 COMPOSANTS PUPITRE C150EF 10724624 CENTRAL CONSOLE COMPONENTS I02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

H1 1 LAMPE 10097203-001 BULB
H2 1 AVERTISSEUR SONORE 10097589-001 SOUND ALARM
INC 1 PLATINE INCLINOMETRE 10098515-001 INCLINOMETER PANEL
INCL 1 CLINOMETRE SPHERIQUE 10097308-001 BUBBLE CLINOMETER
INCL 1 CLINOMETRE SPHERIQUE 10097310-001 BUBBLE CLINOMETER
INCL 2 JOINT INCLINOMETRE 10859088-001 GASKET
INCL 6 VIS CS 10096106-001 SCREW CS
INCL 6 ECROU H 10096123-001 NUT H
INCL 6 RONDELLE 10096138-001 WASHER
INCL 6 RONDELLE CONTACT 10096142-001 WASHER
L1...L4 1 REPERES BORNES VIERGE 10551236-001 TERMINAL MARKING
L1...L4 4 BLOC DE JONCTION 10097826-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
L1...L4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097829-001 END SIDE
L1...L4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10098125-001 TERMINAL MARK
L1...L4 2 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST
M0 1 RACK EXTENSIBLE 10109189-001 EXTENSIBLE BASE
M0 1 ALIMENTATION AUTOMATE 10096489-001 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER SUPPLY
M0 1 TERMINAISON DE LIGNE 10096496-001 LINE PLUG
M01 1 PROCESSEUR AUTOMATE 10549518-001 PLC COMPUTER
M01 1 CARTE SAUVEGARDE 10096535-001 BACKUP CARD
M01 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10096555-001 NETWORK CABLE
M02 1 MODULE DIAGNOSTIC 10568372-001 DIAGNOSTIC MODULE
M1 1 MODULE ETHERNET MODBUS 10549296-001 ETHERNET MODBUS MODULUS
M1 1 BORNIERS DEBROCHABLES A VIS 10549297-001 REMOVABLE TERMINAL BLOCK
M1 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10096555-001 NETWORK CABLE
M2 1 MODULE DISTRIBUTION D'ALIMENTATION 10549304-001 SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION MODULUS
M3-M4 2 MODULE 16 ENTREES 10549305-001 16 INPUTS MODULUS
M5 1 MODULE 16 SORTIES 10549491-001 16 OUTPUTS MODULUS

Page 2 / 4
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10731538-001 Rev.03 COMPOSANTS PUPITRE C150EF 10724624 CENTRAL CONSOLE COMPONENTS I02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

M6 1 MODULE 8 ENTREES ANALOGIQUES TENSION 10549308-001 8 ANALOGIC INPUTS MODULUS
P1 1 POTENTIOMETRE 10097149-001 POTENTIOMETER
P1 1 SUPPORT AUXILIAIRE 10096814-001 AUXILIARY SUPPORT
PC1 1 MAGELIS UNITE CENTRALE + LOGICIEL 10702449-001 MAGELIS CPU + SOFTWARE
PC1 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10096551-001 NETWORK CABLE
PC1 1 MINI CLE USB 10724796-001 USB SAVE KEY
PC2 1 MINI CLE USB 10724796-001 USB SAVE KEY
PC2 1 MAGELIS UNITE CENTRALE + LOGICIEL 10702449-001 MAGELIS CPU + SOFTWARE
PC2 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10096551-001 NETWORK CABLE
PLUG 1 PRISE DE COURANT 10097789-001 CURRENT SOCKET
PWR 1 RELAIS 10096729-001 CONTROL RELAY
PWR 1 EMBASE RELAIS EMBROCHABLE 10098201-001 BASE FOR RELAY
PWR 1 ETRIER DE MAINTIEN RELAIS 10097462-001 RELAY HOLDER
R1 1 RESISTANCE A AILETTES 10096856-001 BLADES RESISTOR
R1 1 BLOC DE JONCTION 10096013-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
S1 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097238-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S1 1 ETRIER 10097222-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S1 4 CONTACT NF 10097223-001 CONTACT NC
S1 1 COLLERETTE DE GARDE BASSE 10097491-001 PROTECTIVE RING
S2 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097281-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S2-S3-S4 3 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097288-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
S3 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097282-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S4 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097281-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S5-S6-S7 3 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097280-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S5-S6-S7 3 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097288-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
S8-S9-S10 3 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097283-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S8-S9-S10 3 LENTILLE BOUTON ROUGE 10097284-001 RED FLAT LENSE
S8-S9-S10 3 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097288-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON

Page 3 / 4
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10731538-001 Rev.03 COMPOSANTS PUPITRE C150EF 10724624 CENTRAL CONSOLE COMPONENTS I02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

SG 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097302-001 HEAD BUTTONS
SG 1 CORPS DE BOUTON 10097303-001 BODY FOR PUSH BUTTON
SH1-SH2-SH3 3 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097283-001 HEAD BUTTONS
SH1-SH2-SH3 3 LENTILLE BOUTON BLANC 10097290-001 WHITE FLAT LENSE
SH1-SH2-SH3 3 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097294-001 BODY FOR LIGHTING PUSH BUTTON
SH1-SH2-SH3 3 LAMPE 10097204-001 BULB
SH4-SH5-SH6 3 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097280-001 HEAD BUTTONS
SH4-SH5-SH6 3 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097289-001 BODY FOR LIGHTING PUSH BUTTON
SH4-SH5-SH6 3 LAMPE 10097202-001 BULB
SH7-SH8-SH9 3 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097280-001 HEAD BUTTONS
SH7-SH8-SH9 3 CORPS DE BOUTON POUSSOIR LUMINEUX 10097289-001 BODY FOR LIGHTING PUSH BUTTON
SH7-SH8-SH9 3 LAMPE 10097202-001 BULB
SW 1 ROUTEUR 10096579-001 SWITCH
V1-V2 2 VENTILATEUR 10568438-001 FAN
V1-V2 2 GRILLE DE SORTIE 10568439-001 OUTPUT GRID
X1...X4 40 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X1...X4 4 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X1...X4 4 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X1...X4 4 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST
X5 4 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
X5 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
X5 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
X5 1 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST

Page 4 / 4
I03
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724049-001 Rev.02 BOITE BOUTON COMMANDE FREIN 10725190 BRAKE CONTROL BUTTON BOX 8,5 I03

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 BOITE A BOUTON 10096000-001 CONTROL STATION ENCLOSURE
1 COMMUTATEUR 10110359-001 SELECTOR SWITCH
1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
1 ETIQUETTE BRAKE RELEASE 10725040-001 LABEL
1 ETIQUETTE MOTOR BRAKE SELECT 10725041-001 LABEL
1 PRISE FICHE MALE 10725300-001 CABLE CONNECTING RECEPTACLE
1 SERRE CABLE FICHE 10725301-001 CABLE CLAMP
20.00ML CABLE 10725304-001 CABLE
1 MASTIC SILICONE NOIR 10061641-001 BLACK SILICONE MASTIC
1 PRESSE ETOUPE 10102262-001 GABLE GLAND

Page 1 / 1
I04
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724050-001 Rev.09 COFFRET COMMANDE LOCALE + ELT 10725189 LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLE 10 I04

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

BORNE 25 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
BORNE 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 2 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST
BORNE 1 BORNE RESSORT 10892087-001 TERMINAL UNIT
CABLE 25,00ML CABLE 10097672-001 CABLE
CABLE 10 EMBOUT 10096027-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 20 EMBOUT 10096025-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 50 MANCHON DE REPERAGE BLANC 10098084-001 WHITE CABLE MARK
COFF 1 JOINT FACE PARLANTE 10095952-001 PANEL GASKET
COFF 6 VIS H 10102521-001 SCREW H
COFF 1 FACE PARLANTE 10725310-001 FRONT FACE
COFF 1 ENVELOPPE 10743750-001 HOUSING
COFF 6 RONDELLE DE SECURITE / ETANCHEITE 10938218-001 LOCKING AND SEALING WASHERS
H1 1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
H1 1 ETIQUETTE 10098936-001 LABEL
PE 1 PRESSE ETOUPE 10892183-001 CABLE GLAND
PE 1 ECROU 10870382-001 NUT
PE 1 BAGUE MISE A LA MASSE 10902207-001 EARTH TAG
PE 1 VIS H 10030028-001 SCREW H
PE 1 RONDELLE CONTACT 10029250-001 CONTACT WASHER
PE 1 ECROU H 10102150-001 NUT H
PE 0,25ML CABLE 10097690-001 CABLE
PE 1 EMBOUT 10096024-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
PE 1 COSSE A ŒIL 10096268-001 RING EYE
PE 2 RONDELLE 10029608-001 WASHER

Page 1 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724050-001 Rev.09 COFFRET COMMANDE LOCALE + ELT 10725189 LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLE 10 I04

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

PLUG 1 PRISE EMBASE FEMELLE 10725299-001 MOUNTING RECEPTACLE
PLUG 4 ECROU H 10096131-001 NUT H
PLUG 8 RONDELLE CONTACT 10096143-001 CONTACT WASHER
PLUG 4 VIS CS 10096115-001 SCREW CS
PLUG 1 BOUCHON EMBASE 10725302-001 INTAKE PLUG
PLUG 1 ETIQUETTE PRISE BOITE PORTABLE FREIN 10762544-001 FUNCTION LABEL
S1 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097273-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S1 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S1 1 ETIQUETTE "POWER OFF-ON" 10110287-001 LABEL "POWER OFF-ON"
S1 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S2 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S2 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S2 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S2 1 ETIQUETTE ELT HULL UP 10725038-001 LABEL
S3 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S3 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S3 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S3 1 ETIQUETTE ELT LEG UP 10725039-001 LABEL
S4 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S4 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S4 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S4 1 ETIQUETTE BRAKE RELEASE 10725040-001 LABEL
S5 1 COMMUTATEUR 10110359-001 SELECTOR SWITCH
S5 1 ETIQUETTE MOTOR BRAKE SELECT 10725041-001 LABEL

Page 2 / 2
I05
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724051-001 Rev.06 COFFRET COMMANDE AUTOMATE SECOURS 10724860 PLC BACKUP CONTROL CHEST 20 I05

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

AL 1 ALIMENTATION 10709479-001 SUPPLY
BARRE MASSE 1 BARRE 10097689-001 BAR
BARRE MASSE 2 ISOLATEUR MALE FEMELLE 10096251-001 ISOLATOR
BARRE MASSE 2 ECROU POUR DIN SYMETRIQUE 10096128-001 NUT FOR DIN SYMMETRICAL
BARRE MASSE 2 VIS CS 10096100-001 SCREW CS
BARRE MASSE 4 RONDELLE CONTACT 10029207-001 CONTACT WASHER
BORNE 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
BORNE 10 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES VIERGE 10551125-001 TERMINAL MARKING BASE
BORNE 3 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST
CABLE 25,00ML CABLE 10097672-001 CABLE
CABLE 50 EMBOUT 10096025-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 50 MANCHON DE REPERAGE BLANC 10098084-001 WHITE CABLE MARK
CHASSIS 2,50ML PROFILE DIN SYMETRIQUE 10099305-001 SYMMETRIC DIN PROFILED
CHASSIS 1,00ML PROFILE DIN ASYMETRIQUE 10099298-001 ASYMMETRIC DIN SECTION
CHASSIS 12 ECROU A AGRAFE 10096038-001 NUT
CHASSIS 18 VIS H 10096054-001 SCREW H
CHASSIS 10 LYRE SUR PROFILE SYMETRIQUE 10098188-001 QUADRANT
CHASSIS 2,00ML COUVERCLE 10096055-001 COVER
CHASSIS 1,00ML GOULOTTE 10096053-001 CABLE DUCTING
CHASSIS 1 MONTANT 10099274-001 MOUNTING RAIL
COFFRET 1 TOLERIE COFFRET 10884408-001 PLATE
ETIQ 1 ETIQUETTE RESEAU 10724775-001 NETWORK LABEL
H1 1 ETIQUETTE 10099801-001 LABEL
H1 1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097552-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
L1...L4 4 BLOC DE JONCTION 10097826-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
L1...L4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097829-001 END SIDE

Page 1 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724051-001 Rev.06 COFFRET COMMANDE AUTOMATE SECOURS 10724860 PLC BACKUP CONTROL CHEST 20 I05

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

L1...L4 1 BORNE RESSORT 10098125-001 TERMINAL MARK
M0 1 RACK EXTENSIBLE 10109189-001 EXTENSIBLE BASE
M0 1 ALIMENTATION AUTOMATE 10096489-001 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER SUPPLY
M0 1 TERMINAISON DE LIGNE 10096496-001 LINE PLUG
M01 1 CORDON RJ45-RJ45 10096550-001 NETWORK CABLE
M01 1 CARTE SAUVEGARDE 10096535-001 BACKUP CARD
M01 1 PROCESSEUR AUTOMATE 10549518-001 PLC COMPUTER
M02 1 MODULE DIAGNOSTIC 10568372-001 DIAGNOSTIC MODULE
MASSE 1 COSSE 10096005-001 RING EYE
PLUG 1 PRISE DE COURANT 10097789-001 CURRENT SOCKET
Q1 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q2 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097530-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q3 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097525-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
R1 1 RESISTANCE A AILETTES 10096859-001 BLADES RESISTOR
SW 1 ROUTEUR 10096578-001 SWITCH

Page 2 / 2
I06
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724052-001 Rev.09 COFFRET COMMANDE JACKING SECOURS 10724861 EMERGENCY JACKING CONTROL CHEST 10 I06

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

BORNE 30 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
BORNE 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 2 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551116-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 1 BORNE RESSORT 10892087-001 TERMINAL UNIT
CABLE 20,00ML CABLE 10097672-001 CABLE
CABLE 50 EMBOUT 10096025-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 60 MANCHON DE REPERAGE BLANC 10098084-001 WHITE CABLE MARK
CABLE 10 EMBOUT 10096027-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
COFF 1 JOINT FACE PARLANTE 10095952-001 PANEL GASKET
COFF 6 RONDELLE CONTACT 10096144-001 CONTACT WASHER
COFF 6 VIS H 10102521-001 SCREW H
COFF 1 FACE PARLANTE 10707354-001 FRONT FACE
COFF 1 ENVELOPPE 10743750-001 HOUSING
H1 1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
H1 1 ETIQUETTE 10098936-001 LABEL
H2 1 VOYANT ROUGE A LED 10097549-001 LED RED PILOT LIGHT
H2 1 ETIQUETTE 10098937-001 LABEL
H3 1 BUZZER 10097602-001 BUZZER
H3 1 ETIQUETTE BUZZER 10884403-001 FUNCTION LABEL
PE 1 PRESSE ETOUPE 10892183-001 CABLE GLAND
PE 1 ECROU 10870382-001 NUT
PE 1 BAGUE MISE A LA MASSE 10902207-001 EARTH TAG
PE 1 VIS H 10030028-001 SCREW H
PE 1 RONDELLE CONTACT 10029250-001 CONTACT WASHER

Page 1 / 3
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724052-001 Rev.09 COFFRET COMMANDE JACKING SECOURS 10724861 EMERGENCY JACKING CONTROL CHEST 10 I06

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

PE 1 ECROU H 10102150-001 NUT H
PE 0,25ML CABLE 10097690-001 CABLE
PE 1 EMBOUT 10096024-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
PE 1 RONDELLE 10029608-001 WASHER
PE 1 COSSE A ŒIL 10096268-001 RING EYE
S0 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097238-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S0 1 ETRIER 10097222-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S0 4 CONTACT NF 10097223-001 CONTACT NC
S0 1 ETIQUETTE 10098940-001 LABEL
S1 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097273-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S1 1 ETRIER 10097222-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S1 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S1 1 ETIQUETTE "POWER OFF-ON" 10110287-001 LABEL "POWER OFF-ON"
S2 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097264-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S2 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S2 1 CONTACT NF 10097223-001 CONTACT NC
S2 1 ETIQUETTE "STOP" 10110290-001 LABEL "STOP"
S3 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S3 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S3 1 ETIQUETTE "LAMPS TEST" 10110288-001 LABEL "LAMPS TEST"
S3 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S4 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097265-001 HEAD BUTTONS
S4 1 ETRIER 10097241-001 CONTACT HOLDER
S4 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
S4 1 ETIQUETTE "ACKNOWLEDGE" 10110289-001 LABEL "ACKNOWLEDGE"
SH1 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097231-001 HEAD BUTTONS
SH1 1 ETRIER 10097222-001 CONTACT HOLDER

Page 2 / 3
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10724052-001 Rev.09 COFFRET COMMANDE JACKING SECOURS 10724861 EMERGENCY JACKING CONTROL CHEST 10 I06

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

SH1 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
SH1 1 CORPS DE VOYANT 10096089-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT
SH1 1 ETIQUETTE 10098938-001 LABEL
SH2 1 TETE BOUTONNERIE 10097231-001 HEAD BUTTONS
SH2 1 ETRIER 10097222-001 CONTACT HOLDER
SH2 1 CONTACT NO 10097224-001 CONTACT NO
SH2 1 CORPS DE VOYANT 10096089-001 BODY OF PILOT LIGHT
SH2 1 ETIQUETTE 10098939-001 LABEL

Page 3 / 3
I07
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10725110-001 Rev.05 COFFRET COMMANDE RESISTANCE AIR 10725111 AIR RESISTOR CONTROL CHEST 150 I07

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

AL 1 ALIMENTATION 10709479-001 SUPPLY
AMP 1 AMPEREMETRE 10683389-001 AMPEREMETER
AMP 1 ETIQUETTE AMPEREMETRE 10884407-001 AMMETER LABEL
BORNE 20 BLOC DE JONCTION 10551113-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
BORNE 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097828-001 END SIDE
BORNE 1 REPERES BORNES 10551114-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 1 REPERE BORNES 10551115-001 TERMINAL MARKING
BORNE 3 BUTEE D'ARRET 10097749-001 STOP THRUST
CABLE 30,00ML CABLE 10097604-001 CABLE
CABLE 2,00ML CABLE 10097603-001 CABLE
CABLE 60 EMBOUT SIMPLE 10096023-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CABLE 30 EMBOUT DOUBLE 10096026-001 FERRULE / SIMPLE
CH 1 COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10097309-001 HOUR METER
CH 1 ETIQUETTE COMPTEUR HORAIRE 10884405-001 HOURMETER LABEL
CT 1 TRANSFORMATEUR INTENSITE 10549500-001 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
ETIQ 2 VIS CS 10096115-001 SCREW CS
ETIQ 2 ECROU H 10096131-001 NUT H
ETIQ 4 RONDELLE CONTACT 10096143-001 CONTACT WASHER
FAN 1 VENTILATEUR FILTRE 10098271-001 FAN
FAN 1 GRILLE DE SORTIE 10098272-001 OUTPUT GRID
H1 1 ETIQUETTE 10099801-001 LABEL
H1 1 VOYANT BLANC A LED 10097548-001 LED WHITE PILOT LIGHT
MASSE 1 CABLE 10097670-001 CABLE
Q1 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097526-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q2 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097530-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q3 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097530-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
Q4 1 DISJONCTEUR 10097411-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
RC 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10110187-001 POWER CONTACTOR

Page 1 / 2
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10725110-001 Rev.05 COFFRET COMMANDE RESISTANCE AIR 10725111 AIR RESISTOR CONTROL CHEST 150 I07

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

RC 1 BOBINE 10110188-001 COIL
RC 1 CONTACTS AUXILIAIRES 10096696-001 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
RH 1 RESISTANCE RECHAUFFAGE 10096861-001 RESISTOR
RM 1 RELAIS 10097910-001 CONTROL RELAY
RM 1 CONTACTS TEMPORISES REPOS 10096716-001 TIME DELAY CONTACTS
S 1 DISJONCTEUR 10683384-001 CIRCUIT BREAKER
S 1 POIGNEE DE COMMANDE EXTERIEURE 10110837-001 EXTERNAL OPERATING HANDLE
S 1 CACHE BORNE 10110282-001 ELECTRICAL PROTECTION
S 1 PROTECTION POIGNEE 10683386-001 PROTECTION KIT
T1 1 TRANSFORMATEUR 10099488-001 TRANSFORMER
U-V-W 3 BLOC DE JONCTION 10097826-001 TERMINAL BLOCK
U-V-W 1 BORNE RESSORT 10097829-001 END SIDE
V 1 CONTACTEUR PUISSANCE 10097873-001 POWER CONTACTOR
1 CHASSIS APPAREILLAGE RESISTANCE CHARGE 10682285-001 RESISTOR CHEST FRAME
1 TOLERIE ARMOIRE D'APPAREILLAGE 10683735-001 CONTROL GEAR METAL SHEET
2 SUPPORT GOULOTTE 10099326-001 SLOTTED CABLE DUCT HOLDER
1 ETIQUETTE REPERAGE DE PHASES 10887530-001 LABEL

Page 2 / 2
PART J
Identification Document
ELECTRIC MOTORS

• Motor technical data sheet J01

10725180

• Parts lists, drawings J02

 Electric motor 10030825 41003118

 Electric motor 10030826

 Equipped stator 10034402

 Equipped rotor 10034874
 Brake assembly 10036293
 Connecting equipment 10035877
 Equipment 10035218
 Data plates 10035541

ABR – 13/06/14 – Rev. 01 GG-C150EF-J

J01
Page 1 sur 1

Write by : [Link] MOTOR TECHNICAL DATA SHEET

Check by : [Link] N° 10725180
Revision 01 First issue Date : 21/05/2013
02 Update Date : 14/01/2014
03 Mini brake torque value Date : 22/09/2014

Customer reference : Ship-owner :

Date order : Yard :
Certification : ABS Ship type : JACKUP
NOV order : Number :

Driven machine : C150EF JACK UP MECHANISM

3 PHASES ASYNCHRONOUS MOTOR NAME PLATE

PLAQUE DE FIRME MOTEUR ASYNCHRONE TRIPHASE

Hz 60 Type MCC 425

Volts 690 N° ……….
KW 46 Duty type S2 – 70 mn
Speed 1727 Insulation class H
Amp 49 Temp. Rise class H
Cos Phi 0.86 Ambient temp. 50°C
Rotor A Protection IP56
Rotor V Weight 1000 kg

MAGNETIC BRAKE NAME PLATE

PLAQUE DE FIRME FREIN MAGNETIQUE

Type F20-430
Voltage 115/30 V
Amp 22/4 A

OTHERS CHARACTERISTICS / AUTRES CARACTERISTIQUES

Thermal protection / Protection thermique (stator) : 2 x 3 PTC
Heating / Réchauffage : 200 W / 115-220 V
Rating plates / Plaques signalétiques : English–French / Anglais - Français
Standard electric cables output / Sortie de câbles standard : Yes / Oui
Mini brake torque value/ Valeur mini du couple de frein : 43 daNm

IDENTIFICATION
Orientation of the terminal box, motor seen shaft end side / Orientation boite vue en bout d’arbre

Orientation to left / à gauche to right / à droite

Quantity / Quantité 27 27
Identification 10030826-001 10030825-001
Serial number / N° série
J02
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10030825-001 Rev.01 MOTEUR ELECTRIQUE 41003118 ELECTRIC MOTOR 1000 J02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

N 10 1 STATOR EQUIPE 10034402-001 EQUIPPED STATOR J02-N10
N 20 1 ROTOR EQUIPE 10034874-001 EQUIPPED ROTOR J02-N20
N 30 1 ELECTRO FREIN 10036293-001 BRAKE ASSEMBLY J02-N30
N 40 1 RACCORDEMENT 10035877-001 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT J02-N40
N 50 1 HABILLAGE 10035218-001 EQUIPMENT J02-N50
N 60 1 PLAQUES SIGNALETIQUES 10035541-001 DATA PLATES J02-N60

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10030826-001 Rev.01 MOTEUR ELECTRIQUE 41003118 ELECTRIC MOTOR 1000 J02

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10034402-001 Rev.01 STATOR EQUIPE 41003118 EQUIPPED STATOR J02-N10

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

1 1 CARCASSE MOTEUR 10033052-001 MOTOR CARCASE
5 1 CIRCLIPS - I - 10029198-001 CIRCLIP - I -
6 1 NEZ DE CENTRAGE 10035005-001 CENTERING NOSE
8 2 OREILLE DE LEVAGE 10032165-001 HOISTING LUG
9 4 VIS H 10102401-001 SCREW H
10 1 STATOR BOBINE 10034403-001 COILED STATOR
20 0.30ML GAINE THERMORETRACTABLE NOIR 10028278-001 BLACK THERMO-RETRACTABLE SHEATH
21 0.02ML GAINE THERMORETRACTABLE NOIR 10028560-001 BLACK THERMO-RETRACTABLE SHEATH
22 0.06ML GAINE THERMORETRACTABLE NOIR 10028560-001 BLACK THERMO-RETRACTABLE SHEATH
25 0.80KG VERNIS ANTIFLASH & DILUANT 10028270-001 FLASH PROOF VARNISH & THINNER
26 0.01KG GRAISSE 10103933-001 GREASE

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10034874-001 Rev.02 ROTOR EQUIPE 41003118 EQUIPPED ROTOR 203,5 J02-N20

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

30 1 ROTOR BAGUE 10113064-001 RINGED ROTOR
31 1 ROULEMENT 10030618-001 BEARING
32 1 BAGUE POUR JOINT D'ETANCHEITE 10034041-001 RING FOR GASKET
33 1 CLAVETTE 10029066-001 KEY
34 1 CIRCLIPS - E - 10102353-001 CIRCLIP - E -
35 1 ROULEMENT 10030612-001 BEARING
36 16 RONDELLE RESSORT 10030510-001 WASHER SPRING
40 0.01KG GRAISSE 10103933-001 GREASE
41 0 CARTOUCHE SILICONE BLANC NEUTRE 10104152-001 CARTRIDGE OF SILICONE NEUTRAL WHITE
45 6 BAGUETTE CASTOLIN 10104204-001 WELDING CONSUMABLE
46 0.05KG DECAPANT CASTOLIN 10104063-001 WELDING CONSUMABLE

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10036293-001 Rev.03 ELECTRO FREIN 41003118 BRAKE ASSEMBLY 46 J02-N30

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

50 1 CARCASSE BOBINEE 10038947-001 COILED CARCASE
51 6 VIS H 10102411-001 SCREW H
52 1 RESSORT MONTE 10040505-001 SPRING ASSEMBLY
55 1 ARMATURE MOBILE 10037042-001 PLATE ARMATURE
56 1 DISQUE MONTE 10038841-001 DISC ASSEMBLY
57 1 MANCHON CANNELE 10038564-001 SPLINED SLEEVE
60 1 COUVERCLE 10037405-001 COVER
61 6 CALE REGLAGE COUVERCLE 10037972-001 ADJUSTING SHIM COVER
62 1 JOINT COUVERCLE 10035288-001 COVER GASKET
63 6 VIS H 10078382-001 SCREW H
65 0.10KG VERNIS ANTIFLASH & DILUANT 10028270-001 FLASH PROOF VARNISH & THINNER
66 1 CARTOUCHE SILICONE BLANC NEUTRE 10104152-001 CARTRIDGE OF SILICONE NEUTRAL WHITE
68 1 SECURITE FREIN 10036445-001 BRAKE SAFETY
80 2 CONNEXION 10044287-001 CONNECTION
82 0.30ML GAINE VERRE-VERNIS EPOXY 10028547-001 GLASS-EPOXY VARNISH SHEATH
83 2 ETRIER MOTEURS 10035435-001 STIRRUP MOTORS

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10035877-001 Rev.01 RACCORDEMENT 41003118 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT J02-N40

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

68 1 BRIDE 10035459-001 FLANGE
69 4 VIS H 10078382-001 SCREW H
70 1 RECHAUFFAGE 10035886-001 HEATING
72 1 BARRETTE A BORNES 10035801-001 BAR TERMINALS
75 CARTOUCHE SILICONE BLANC NEUTRE 10104152-001 CARTRIDGE OF SILICONE NEUTRAL WHITE

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10035218-001 Rev.05 HABILLAGE 41003118 EQUIPMENT J02-N50

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

A 1 BOITE A BORNES 10035952-001 TERMINAL BOX
C 1 ENTREE DE CABLES 10035221-001 CABLE ENTRANCE
M 1 NEZ DE PALIER 10034944-001 CENTERING NOSE
O 1 BORNE DE MASSE 10031297-001 GROUND TERMINAL
R 1 BOUCHON EQUIPE 10036486-001 EQUIPPED PLUG
S 1 SECURITE FREIN 10036473-001 BRAKE SAFETY
T 1 MESURE ENTREFER 10036483-001 CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT
U 1 BOUCHON EQUIPE 10036486-001 EQUIPPED PLUG
V 2 VIS DEBLOCAGE 10046686-001 BRAKE RELEASE SCREW
90 0.10KG VERNIS ANTIFLASH & DILUANT 10028270-001 FLASH PROOF VARNISH & THINNER
91 1 PORAJOINT 10104293-001 PORAJOINT
92 1 COLLE BOSTICK 10104007-001 GLUE BOSTICK
94 0.01KG GRAISSE 10103933-001 GREASE

Page 1 / 1
Part NB Ensemble Document(s) Assembly Weight (kg) Code
10035541-001 Rev.02 PLAQUES SIGNALETIQUES 41003118 DATA PLATES J02-N60

Item Quantity Désignation Part NB Description Code

101 1 PLAQUE SIGNALETIQUE (CAGE) 10035542-001 DATA PLATE (CAGE)
103 1 PLAQUE SIGNALETIQUE (FREIN) 10035537-001 DATA PLATE (BRAKE)
105 10 CLOU CANNELE 10102135-001 GROOVED NAIL
110 1 CARTOUCHE SILICONE BLANC NEUTRE 10104152-001 CARTRIDGE OF SILICONE NEUTRAL WHITE

Page 1 / 1

Common questions